OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc_2011-10-31/openrisc_2011-10-31/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc_2011-10-31

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-src/] [binutils-2.18.50/] [texinfo/] [texinfo.tex] - Blame information for rev 156

Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 38 julius
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2
%
3
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5
%
6
\def\texinfoversion{2004-02-19.09}
7
%
8
% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software
10
% Foundation, Inc.
11
%
12
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
13
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
15
% your option) any later version.
16
%
17
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
20
% General Public License for more details.
21
%
22
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
24
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
25
% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
26
%
27
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
28
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
29
% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
30
%
31
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
32
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
33
%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
34
%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
35
%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
36
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
37
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
38
%
39
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
40
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
41
% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
42
%
43
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
44
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
45
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
46
%   tex foo.texi
47
%   texindex foo.??
48
%   tex foo.texi
49
%   tex foo.texi
50
%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
51
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
52
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
53
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
54
%
55
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
56
% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
57
% full Texinfo distribution.
58
%
59
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
60
 
61
 
62
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
63
 
64
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
65
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
66
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
67
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
68
  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
69
 
70
\message{Basics,}
71
\chardef\other=12
72
 
73
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
74
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
75
\let\+ = \relax
76
 
77
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
78
\let\ptexb=\b
79
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
80
\let\ptexc=\c
81
\let\ptexcomma=\,
82
\let\ptexdot=\.
83
\let\ptexdots=\dots
84
\let\ptexend=\end
85
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
86
\let\ptexexclam=\!
87
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
88
\let\ptexgtr=>
89
\let\ptexhat=^
90
\let\ptexi=\i
91
\let\ptexindent=\indent
92
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
93
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
94
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
95
\let\ptexless=<
96
\let\ptexplus=+
97
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
98
\let\ptexslash=\/
99
\let\ptexstar=\*
100
\let\ptext=\t
101
 
102
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
103
% starts a new line in the output.
104
\newlinechar = `^^J
105
 
106
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
107
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
108
%
109
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
110
  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
111
\else
112
  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
113
\fi
114
 
115
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
116
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
117
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
118
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
119
\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
120
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
121
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
122
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
123
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
124
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
125
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
126
\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
127
\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
128
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
129
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
130
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
131
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
132
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
133
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
134
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
135
%
136
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
137
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
138
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
139
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
140
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
141
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
142
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
143
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
144
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
145
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
146
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
147
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
148
%
149
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
150
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
151
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
152
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
153
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
154
 
155
% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
156
% in some cases the escape char.
157
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
158
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
159
\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
160
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
161
\chardef\questChar = `\?
162
\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
163
\chardef\underChar = `\_
164
 
165
\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
166
\chardef\spacecat = 10
167
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
168
 
169
% Ignore a token.
170
%
171
\def\gobble#1{}
172
 
173
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
174
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
175
 
176
% Hyphenation fixes.
177
\hyphenation{
178
  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
179
  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
180
  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
181
  par-a-digms rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
182
  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
183
  wide-spread wrap-around
184
}
185
 
186
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
187
\newdimen\bindingoffset
188
\newdimen\normaloffset
189
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
190
 
191
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
192
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
193
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
194
%
195
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
196
 
197
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
198
% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
199
% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
200
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
201
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
202
%
203
\def\|{%
204
  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
205
  \leavevmode
206
  %
207
  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
208
  \vadjust{%
209
    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
210
    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
211
    \vskip-\baselineskip
212
    %
213
    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
214
    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
215
    \llap{%
216
      %
217
      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
218
      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
219
      %
220
      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
221
      \hskip 12pt
222
    }%
223
  }%
224
}
225
 
226
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
227
% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
228
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
229
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
230
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
231
%
232
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
233
\def\loggingall{%
234
  \tracingstats2
235
  \tracingpages1
236
  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
237
  \tracingparagraphs1
238
  \tracingoutput1
239
  \tracingmacros2
240
  \tracingrestores1
241
  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
242
  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
243
    \tracingscantokens1
244
    \tracingifs1
245
    \tracinggroups1
246
    \tracingnesting2
247
    \tracingassigns1
248
  \fi
249
  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
250
  \errorcontextlines16
251
}%
252
 
253
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
254
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
255
%
256
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
257
  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
258
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
259
  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
260
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
261
  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
262
 
263
% For @cropmarks command.
264
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
265
%
266
\newif\ifcropmarks
267
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
268
%
269
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
270
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
271
%
272
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
273
\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
274
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
275
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
276
 
277
% Main output routine.
278
\chardef\PAGE = 255
279
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
280
 
281
\newbox\headlinebox
282
\newbox\footlinebox
283
 
284
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
285
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
286
\def\onepageout#1{%
287
  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
288
  %
289
  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
290
  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
291
  %
292
  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
293
  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
294
  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
295
  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
296
  %
297
  {%
298
    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
299
    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
300
    % before the \shipout runs.
301
    %
302
    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
303
    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
304
    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
305
                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
306
    \shipout\vbox{%
307
      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
308
      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
309
      %
310
      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
311
        \hsize = \outerhsize
312
        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
313
        \vtop to0pt{%
314
          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
315
          \nointerlineskip
316
          \line{%
317
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
318
            \hfill
319
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
320
          }%
321
          \vss}%
322
        \vskip\topandbottommargin
323
        \line\bgroup
324
          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
325
          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
326
          \vbox\bgroup
327
      \fi
328
      %
329
      \unvbox\headlinebox
330
      \pagebody{#1}%
331
      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
332
        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
333
        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
334
        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
335
        \vskip 2\baselineskip
336
        \unvbox\footlinebox
337
      \fi
338
      %
339
      \ifcropmarks
340
          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
341
        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
342
        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
343
        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
344
        \vbox to0pt{\vss
345
          \line{%
346
            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
347
            \hfill
348
            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
349
          }%
350
          \nointerlineskip
351
          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
352
        }%
353
      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
354
      \fi
355
    }% end of \shipout\vbox
356
  }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
357
  \advancepageno
358
  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
359
}
360
 
361
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
362
 
363
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
364
{\catcode`\@ =11
365
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
366
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
367
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
368
  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
369
\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
370
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
371
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
372
}
373
 
374
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
375
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
376
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
377
%
378
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
379
\def\nstop{\vbox
380
  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
381
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
382
\def\nsbot{\vbox
383
  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
384
 
385
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
386
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
387
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
388
%
389
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
390
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
391
  \def\next{#2}%
392
  \begingroup
393
    \obeylines
394
    \spaceisspace
395
    #1%
396
    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
397
}
398
 
399
{\obeylines %
400
  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
401
    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
402
    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
403
  }%
404
}
405
 
406
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
407
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
408
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
409
 
410
% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
411
%
412
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
413
%    @end itemize  @c foo
414
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
415
% by \finishparsearg.
416
%
417
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
418
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
419
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
420
  \def\temp{#3}%
421
  \ifx\temp\empty
422
    % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
423
    % thus we reuse \temp.
424
    \let\temp\finishparsearg
425
  \else
426
    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
427
  \fi
428
  % Put the space token in:
429
  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
430
}
431
 
432
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
433
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
434
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
435
% just before passing the control to \next.
436
% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
437
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
438
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
439
%
440
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
441
%
442
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
443
 
444
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
445
%       is roughly equivalent to
446
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
447
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
448
%
449
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
450
% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
451
 
452
\def\parseargdef#1{%
453
  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
454
}
455
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
456
  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
457
  \def#1##1%
458
}
459
 
460
% Several utility definitions with active space:
461
{
462
  \obeyspaces
463
  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
464
 
465
  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
466
  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
467
  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
468
  % should produce a line of output anyway.
469
  %
470
  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
471
 
472
  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
473
  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
474
  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
475
  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
476
}
477
 
478
 
479
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
480
 
481
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
482
%
483
%   \envdef\foo{...}
484
%   \def\Efoo{...}
485
%
486
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
487
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
488
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
489
% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
490
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
491
%
492
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
493
% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
494
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
495
% special case.)
496
 
497
 
498
% At runtime, environments start with this:
499
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
500
% initialize
501
\let\thisenv\empty
502
 
503
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
504
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
505
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
506
 
507
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
508
\def\checkenv#1{%
509
  \def\temp{#1}%
510
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
511
  \else
512
    \badenverr
513
  \fi
514
}
515
 
516
% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
517
\def\badenverr{%
518
  \errhelp = \EMsimple
519
  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
520
    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
521
}
522
\def\inenvironment#1{%
523
  \ifx#1\empty
524
    out of any environment%
525
  \else
526
    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
527
  \fi
528
}
529
 
530
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
531
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
532
%
533
\parseargdef\end{%
534
  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
535
  \else
536
    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
537
    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
538
    \csname E#1\endcsname
539
    \endgroup
540
  \fi
541
}
542
 
543
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
544
 
545
 
546
%% Simple single-character @ commands
547
 
548
% @@ prints an @
549
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
550
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
551
 
552
% This is turned off because it was never documented
553
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
554
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
555
%% but suppressing ligatures.
556
%\def\`{{`}}
557
%\def\'{{'}}
558
 
559
% Used to generate quoted braces.
560
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
561
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
562
\let\{=\mylbrace
563
\let\}=\myrbrace
564
\begingroup
565
  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
566
  % and @{ and @} for the aux file.
567
  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
568
  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
569
  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
570
  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
571
  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
572
  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
573
  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
574
!endgroup
575
 
576
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
577
\let\comma = ,
578
 
579
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
580
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
581
\let\, = \c
582
\let\dotaccent = \.
583
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
584
\let\tieaccent = \t
585
\let\ubaraccent = \b
586
\let\udotaccent = \d
587
 
588
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
589
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
590
\def\questiondown{?`}
591
\def\exclamdown{!`}
592
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
593
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
594
 
595
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
596
\def\imacro{i}
597
\def\jmacro{j}
598
\def\dotless#1{%
599
  \def\temp{#1}%
600
  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
601
  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
602
  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
603
  \fi\fi
604
}
605
 
606
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
607
% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
608
%
609
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=3000 }
610
 
611
% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
612
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
613
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
614
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
615
% \scriptscriptstyle).
616
%
617
\def\LaTeX{%
618
  L\kern-.36em
619
  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
620
   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
621
  \kern-.15em
622
  \TeX
623
}
624
 
625
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
626
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
627
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
628
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
629
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
630
{\catcode`@ = 11
631
 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
632
 % if the definition is written into an index file.
633
 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
634
 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
635
}
636
 
637
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
638
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
639
 
640
% @* forces a line break.
641
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
642
 
643
% @/ allows a line break.
644
\let\/=\allowbreak
645
 
646
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
647
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
648
 
649
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
650
\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
651
 
652
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
653
\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
654
 
655
% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
656
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
657
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
658
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
659
 
660
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
661
% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
662
% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
663
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
664
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
665
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
666
% the text is small, which looks bad.
667
%
668
% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
669
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
670
% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
671
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
672
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
673
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
674
%
675
\newbox\groupbox
676
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
677
%
678
\envdef\group{%
679
  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
680
    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
681
    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
682
  \fi
683
  \startsavinginserts
684
  %
685
  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
686
    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
687
    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
688
    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
689
    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
690
    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
691
    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
692
    \comment
693
}
694
%
695
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
696
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
697
% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
698
% above.  But it's pretty close.
699
\def\Egroup{%
700
    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
701
    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
702
    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
703
    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
704
  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
705
  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
706
  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
707
  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
708
  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
709
  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
710
  % group, force a page break.
711
  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
712
    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
713
      \page
714
    \fi
715
  \fi
716
  \box\groupbox
717
  \prevdepth = \dimen1
718
  \checkinserts
719
}
720
%
721
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
722
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
723
%
724
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
725
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
726
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
727
 
728
% @need space-in-mils
729
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
730
 
731
\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
732
 
733
% Old definition--didn't work.
734
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
735
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
736
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
737
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
738
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
739
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
740
%}}
741
 
742
\parseargdef\need{%
743
  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
744
  % paragraph.
745
  \par
746
  %
747
  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
748
  \dimen0 = #1\mil
749
  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
750
  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
751
  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
752
    %
753
    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
754
    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
755
    % And a page break here is fine.
756
    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
757
    %
758
    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
759
    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
760
    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
761
    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
762
    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
763
    %
764
    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
765
    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
766
    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
767
    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
768
    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
769
    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
770
    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
771
    \penalty9999
772
    %
773
    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
774
    \kern -#1\mil
775
    %
776
    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
777
    \nobreak
778
  \fi
779
}
780
 
781
% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
782
 
783
\let\br = \par
784
 
785
% @page forces the start of a new page.
786
%
787
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
788
 
789
% @exdent text....
790
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
791
 
792
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
793
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
794
\newskip\exdentamount
795
 
796
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
797
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
798
 
799
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
800
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
801
  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
802
 
803
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
804
% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
805
% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
806
%
807
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
808
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
809
%
810
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
811
  \nobreak
812
  \kern-\strutdepth
813
  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
814
    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
815
    \vss
816
    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
817
    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
818
    \ifx#1l%
819
      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
820
    \else
821
      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
822
    \fi
823
    \null
824
  }%
825
}}
826
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
827
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
828
%
829
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
830
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
831
% else use TEXT for both).
832
%
833
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
834
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
835
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
836
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
837
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
838
    \def\righttext{#2}%
839
  \else
840
    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
841
    \def\righttext{#1}%
842
  \fi
843
  %
844
  \ifodd\pageno
845
    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
846
  \else
847
    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
848
  \fi
849
  \temp
850
}
851
 
852
% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
853
%
854
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
855
\def\includezzz#1{%
856
  \pushthisfilestack
857
  \def\thisfile{#1}%
858
  {%
859
    \makevalueexpandable
860
    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
861
    \expandafter
862
  }\temp
863
  \popthisfilestack
864
}
865
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
866
  \catcode`\\=\other
867
  \catcode`~=\other
868
  \catcode`^=\other
869
  \catcode`_=\other
870
  \catcode`|=\other
871
  \catcode`<=\other
872
  \catcode`>=\other
873
  \catcode`+=\other
874
  \catcode`-=\other
875
}
876
 
877
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
878
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
879
}
880
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
881
  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
882
}
883
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
884
  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
885
}
886
 
887
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
888
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
889
  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
890
 
891
\def\thisfile{}
892
 
893
% @center line
894
% outputs that line, centered.
895
%
896
\parseargdef\center{%
897
  \ifhmode
898
    \let\next\centerH
899
  \else
900
    \let\next\centerV
901
  \fi
902
  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
903
}
904
\def\centerH#1{%
905
  {%
906
    \hfil\break
907
    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
908
    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
909
    \line{#1}%
910
    \break
911
  }%
912
}
913
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
914
 
915
% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
916
 
917
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
918
 
919
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
920
% @c is the same as @comment
921
% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
922
 
923
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
924
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
925
\commentxxx}
926
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
927
 
928
\let\c=\comment
929
 
930
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
931
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
932
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
933
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
934
%
935
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
936
\def\noneword{none}
937
%
938
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
939
  \def\temp{#1}%
940
  \ifx\temp\asisword
941
  \else
942
    \ifx\temp\noneword
943
      \defaultparindent = 0pt
944
    \else
945
      \defaultparindent = #1em
946
    \fi
947
  \fi
948
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
949
}
950
 
951
% @exampleindent NCHARS
952
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
953
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
954
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
955
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
956
  \def\temp{#1}%
957
  \ifx\temp\asisword
958
  \else
959
    \ifx\temp\noneword
960
      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
961
    \else
962
      \lispnarrowing = #1em
963
    \fi
964
  \fi
965
}
966
 
967
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
968
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
969
% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
970
% paragraphs.
971
%
972
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
973
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
974
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
975
% By default, we suppress indentation.
976
%
977
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
978
\def\insertword{insert}
979
%
980
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
981
  \def\temp{#1}%
982
  \ifx\temp\noneword
983
    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
984
  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
985
    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
986
  \else
987
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
988
    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
989
  \fi\fi
990
}
991
 
992
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
993
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
994
%
995
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
996
% paragraph.
997
%
998
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
999
  \gdef\indent{%
1000
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1001
    \indent
1002
  }%
1003
  \gdef\noindent{%
1004
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1005
    \noindent
1006
  }%
1007
  \global\everypar = {%
1008
    \kern -\parindent
1009
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1010
  }%
1011
}
1012
 
1013
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1014
  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1015
  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1016
  \global \everypar = {}%
1017
}
1018
 
1019
 
1020
% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
1021
%
1022
\def\asis#1{#1}
1023
 
1024
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
1025
%
1026
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
1027
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
1028
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
1029
% which is what @var uses.
1030
{
1031
  \catcode\underChar = \active
1032
  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
1033
    \catcode\underChar=\active
1034
    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
1035
  }
1036
}
1037
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
1038
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
1039
% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
1040
% otherwise define @\.
1041
%
1042
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
1043
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
1044
%
1045
\def\math{%
1046
  \tex
1047
  \mathunderscore
1048
  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
1049
  \mathactive
1050
  $\finishmath
1051
}
1052
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
1053
 
1054
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
1055
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
1056
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
1057
%
1058
{
1059
  \catcode`^ = \active
1060
  \catcode`< = \active
1061
  \catcode`> = \active
1062
  \catcode`+ = \active
1063
  \gdef\mathactive{%
1064
    \let^ = \ptexhat
1065
    \let< = \ptexless
1066
    \let> = \ptexgtr
1067
    \let+ = \ptexplus
1068
  }
1069
}
1070
 
1071
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
1072
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
1073
\def\minus{$-$}
1074
 
1075
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
1076
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
1077
% font as three actual period characters.
1078
%
1079
\def\dots{%
1080
  \leavevmode
1081
  \hbox to 1.5em{%
1082
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
1083
    .\hfil.\hfil.%
1084
    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
1085
  }%
1086
}
1087
 
1088
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
1089
%
1090
\def\enddots{%
1091
  \dots
1092
  \spacefactor=3000
1093
}
1094
 
1095
% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
1096
% Texinfo's parsing.
1097
%
1098
\let\comma = ,
1099
 
1100
% @refill is a no-op.
1101
\let\refill=\relax
1102
 
1103
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1104
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1105
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1106
%
1107
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1108
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1109
 
1110
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1111
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1112
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1113
\def\setfilename{%
1114
   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1115
   \iflinks
1116
     \tryauxfile
1117
     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1118
     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1119
   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1120
   \openindices
1121
   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1122
   %
1123
   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1124
   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1125
   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1126
   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1127
   \closein 1
1128
   %
1129
   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1130
}
1131
 
1132
% Called from \setfilename.
1133
%
1134
\def\openindices{%
1135
  \newindex{cp}%
1136
  \newcodeindex{fn}%
1137
  \newcodeindex{vr}%
1138
  \newcodeindex{tp}%
1139
  \newcodeindex{ky}%
1140
  \newcodeindex{pg}%
1141
}
1142
 
1143
% @bye.
1144
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1145
 
1146
 
1147
\message{pdf,}
1148
% adobe `portable' document format
1149
\newcount\tempnum
1150
\newcount\lnkcount
1151
\newtoks\filename
1152
\newcount\filenamelength
1153
\newcount\pgn
1154
\newtoks\toksA
1155
\newtoks\toksB
1156
\newtoks\toksC
1157
\newtoks\toksD
1158
\newbox\boxA
1159
\newcount\countA
1160
\newif\ifpdf
1161
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1162
 
1163
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
1164
  \pdffalse
1165
  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1166
  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1167
  \let\endlink = \relax
1168
  \let\linkcolor = \relax
1169
  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1170
\else
1171
  \pdftrue
1172
  \pdfoutput = 1
1173
  \input pdfcolor
1174
  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
1175
  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1176
    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
1177
    \def\imageheight{#3}%
1178
    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1179
    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1180
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1181
      \immediate\pdfimage
1182
    \else
1183
      \immediate\pdfximage
1184
    \fi
1185
      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
1186
      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
1187
      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1188
         #1.pdf%
1189
       \else
1190
         {#1.pdf}%
1191
       \fi
1192
    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1193
      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1194
    \fi}
1195
  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1196
    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title
1197
    % aren't expanded.
1198
    \atdummies
1199
    \normalturnoffactive
1200
    \pdfdest name{#1} xyz%
1201
  }}
1202
  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
1203
  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
1204
  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
1205
  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1206
  % come from Petr Olsak
1207
  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1208
    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1209
  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1210
    \advance\tempnum by 1
1211
    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1212
  %
1213
  % #1 is the section text.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1214
  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node
1215
  % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no
1216
  % corresponding node.  #4 is the page number.
1217
  %
1218
  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1219
    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1220
    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
1221
    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1222
    % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured.
1223
    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1224
    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi
1225
    %
1226
    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}%
1227
  }
1228
  %
1229
  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1230
    \begingroup
1231
      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
1232
      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
1233
      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
1234
      %
1235
      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1236
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1237
        \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1238
        \let\thissecnum\empty
1239
        \let\thissubsecnum\empty
1240
      }%
1241
      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1242
        \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1243
        \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1244
        \let\thissubsecnum\empty
1245
      }%
1246
      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1247
        \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1248
        \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1249
      }%
1250
      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1251
        \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1252
      }%
1253
      \let\thischapnum\empty
1254
      \let\thissecnum\empty
1255
      \let\thissubsecnum\empty
1256
      %
1257
      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1258
      % al. a second time, below.
1259
      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1260
      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1261
      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1262
      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1263
      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1264
      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1265
      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1266
      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1267
      \input \jobname.toc
1268
      %
1269
      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1270
      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1271
      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1272
      %
1273
      % We use the node names as the destinations.
1274
      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1275
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1276
      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1277
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1278
      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1279
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1280
      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1281
        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1282
      %
1283
      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1284
      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1285
      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
1286
      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
1287
      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1288
      %
1289
      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1290
      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
1291
      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
1292
      \indexnofonts
1293
      \turnoffactive
1294
      \input \jobname.toc
1295
    \endgroup
1296
  }
1297
  %
1298
  \def\makelinks #1,{%
1299
    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
1300
    \ifx\params\E
1301
      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
1302
    \else
1303
      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
1304
      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
1305
      \picknum{#1}%
1306
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
1307
        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
1308
      \linkcolor #1%
1309
      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
1310
      \endlink
1311
    \fi
1312
    \nextmakelinks
1313
  }
1314
  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
1315
  \def\pn#1{%
1316
    \def\p{#1}%
1317
    \ifx\p\lbrace
1318
      \let\nextpn=\ppn
1319
    \else
1320
      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
1321
      \def\first{#1}
1322
    \fi
1323
    \nextpn
1324
  }
1325
  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
1326
  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
1327
  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
1328
  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1329
    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1330
    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1331
      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1332
        \advance\filenamelength by 1
1333
      \fi
1334
    \fi
1335
    \nextsp}
1336
  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1337
  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1338
    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1339
  \else
1340
    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1341
  \fi
1342
  \def\pdfurl#1{%
1343
    \begingroup
1344
      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
1345
      \makevalueexpandable
1346
      \leavevmode\Red
1347
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1348
        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1349
    \endgroup}
1350
  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1351
  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1352
  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1353
  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1354
  \def\maketoks{%
1355
    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1356
    \ifx\first0\adn0
1357
    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1358
    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1359
    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1360
    \else
1361
      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1362
      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1363
        \let\next=\maketoks
1364
        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1365
        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1366
      \fi
1367
    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1368
    \next}
1369
  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1370
    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1371
  \def\pdflink#1{%
1372
    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1373
    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
1374
  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1375
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1376
 
1377
 
1378
\message{fonts,}
1379
 
1380
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1381
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1382
% italics, not bold italics.
1383
%
1384
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
1385
  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1386
  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
1387
}
1388
 
1389
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1390
%
1391
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1392
 
1393
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1394
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1395
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1396
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}
1397
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1398
 
1399
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1400
% So we set up a \sf.
1401
\newfam\sffam
1402
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1403
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1404
 
1405
% We don't need math for this font style.
1406
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1407
 
1408
% Default leading.
1409
\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
1410
 
1411
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1412
% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1413
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1414
%
1415
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1416
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1417
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1418
%
1419
\def\setleading#1{%
1420
  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
1421
  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1422
  \normalbaselines
1423
  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1424
    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1425
                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1426
  }%
1427
}
1428
 
1429
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1430
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1431
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
1432
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
1433
 
1434
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
1435
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1436
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
1437
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1438
\def\fontprefix{cm}
1439
\fi
1440
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1441
\def\rmshape{r}
1442
\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
1443
\def\bfshape{b}
1444
\def\bxshape{bx}
1445
\def\ttshape{tt}
1446
\def\ttbshape{tt}
1447
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
1448
\def\itshape{ti}
1449
\def\itbshape{bxti}
1450
\def\slshape{sl}
1451
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
1452
\def\sfshape{ss}
1453
\def\sfbshape{ss}
1454
\def\scshape{csc}
1455
\def\scbshape{csc}
1456
 
1457
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1458
\newcount\mainmagstep
1459
\ifx\bigger\relax
1460
  % not really supported.
1461
  \mainmagstep=\magstep1
1462
  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1463
  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1464
\else
1465
  \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
1466
  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1467
  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1468
\fi
1469
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1470
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1471
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1472
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1473
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1474
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1475
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1476
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1477
 
1478
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1479
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
1480
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
1481
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
1482
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1483
 
1484
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1485
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1486
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1487
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1488
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1489
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1490
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1491
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1492
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1493
\font\smalli=cmmi9
1494
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
1495
 
1496
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1497
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1498
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
1499
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
1500
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
1501
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
1502
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
1503
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
1504
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
1505
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
1506
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
1507
 
1508
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1509
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1510
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1511
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1512
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1513
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1514
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1515
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
1516
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1517
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1518
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1519
\def\authorrm{\secrm}
1520
\def\authortt{\sectt}
1521
 
1522
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1523
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1524
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1525
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1526
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1527
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
1528
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1529
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
1530
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1531
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1532
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1533
 
1534
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
1535
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1536
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1537
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1538
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1539
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1540
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1541
\let\secbf\secrm
1542
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1543
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1544
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1545
 
1546
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1547
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1548
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
1549
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
1550
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1551
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
1552
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1553
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1554
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
1555
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1556
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1557
 
1558
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1559
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
1560
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
1561
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
1562
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
1563
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
1564
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
1565
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
1566
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
1567
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
1568
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1569
 
1570
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
1571
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
1572
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
1573
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
1574
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
1575
%
1576
\def\resetmathfonts{%
1577
  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
1578
  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
1579
  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
1580
}
1581
 
1582
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
1583
% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
1584
% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
1585
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
1586
%
1587
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
1588
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
1589
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
1590
%
1591
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
1592
%
1593
\def\textfonts{%
1594
  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
1595
  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
1596
  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
1597
  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1598
  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1599
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
1600
\def\titlefonts{%
1601
  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
1602
  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
1603
  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
1604
  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
1605
  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
1606
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1607
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1608
\def\chapfonts{%
1609
  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
1610
  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
1611
  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1612
  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
1613
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1614
\def\secfonts{%
1615
  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
1616
  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
1617
  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
1618
  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1619
  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
1620
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1621
\def\subsecfonts{%
1622
  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
1623
  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
1624
  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
1625
  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1626
  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
1627
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1628
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
1629
\def\reducedfonts{%
1630
  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
1631
  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
1632
  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
1633
  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
1634
  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1635
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1636
\def\smallfonts{%
1637
  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
1638
  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
1639
  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
1640
  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
1641
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1642
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1643
\def\smallerfonts{%
1644
  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
1645
  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
1646
  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
1647
  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
1648
  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1649
  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
1650
 
1651
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
1652
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
1653
 
1654
% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
1655
% can fit this many characters:
1656
%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
1657
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
1658
%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
1659
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
1660
% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
1661
%
1662
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
1663
%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
1664
%
1665
% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
1666
% --karl, 24jan03.
1667
 
1668
 
1669
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
1670
%
1671
\textfonts \rm
1672
 
1673
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
1674
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
1675
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
1676
 
1677
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
1678
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
1679
 
1680
% Fonts for short table of contents.
1681
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1682
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
1683
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1684
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1685
 
1686
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
1687
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
1688
 
1689
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
1690
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
1691
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
1692
                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
1693
\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1694
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1695
 
1696
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
1697
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
1698
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1699
 
1700
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
1701
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
1702
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1703
 
1704
\let\i=\smartitalic
1705
\let\var=\smartslanted
1706
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
1707
\let\emph=\smartitalic
1708
 
1709
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
1710
\let\strong=\b
1711
 
1712
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
1713
% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
1714
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
1715
%
1716
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
1717
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
1718
 
1719
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
1720
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
1721
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
1722
%
1723
\catcode`@=11
1724
  \def\frenchspacing{%
1725
    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
1726
    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
1727
  }
1728
\catcode`@=\other
1729
 
1730
\def\t#1{%
1731
  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
1732
  \null
1733
}
1734
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
1735
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1736
\font\keysy=cmsy9
1737
\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
1738
  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
1739
    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
1740
     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
1741
    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
1742
  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
1743
% The old definition, with no lozenge:
1744
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
1745
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
1746
 
1747
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
1748
\let\file=\samp
1749
\let\option=\samp
1750
 
1751
% @code is a modification of @t,
1752
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
1753
\def\tclose#1{%
1754
  {%
1755
    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
1756
    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
1757
    %
1758
    % Switch to typewriter.
1759
    \tt
1760
    %
1761
    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
1762
    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
1763
    %
1764
    % Turn off hyphenation.
1765
    \nohyphenation
1766
    %
1767
    \rawbackslash
1768
    \frenchspacing
1769
    #1%
1770
  }%
1771
  \null
1772
}
1773
 
1774
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
1775
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
1776
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
1777
 
1778
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
1779
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
1780
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
1781
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
1782
%  -- rms.
1783
{
1784
  \catcode`\-=\active
1785
  \catcode`\_=\active
1786
  %
1787
  \global\def\code{\begingroup
1788
    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
1789
    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
1790
    \codex
1791
  }
1792
}
1793
 
1794
\def\realdash{-}
1795
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
1796
\def\codeunder{%
1797
  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
1798
  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
1799
  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
1800
  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
1801
  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
1802
               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
1803
             \else\normalunderscore \fi
1804
             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
1805
            {\_}%
1806
}
1807
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
1808
 
1809
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
1810
% then @kbd has no effect.
1811
 
1812
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
1813
%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
1814
%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
1815
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
1816
  \def\arg{#1}%
1817
  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
1818
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
1819
  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
1820
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1821
  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
1822
    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1823
  \else
1824
    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1825
    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}%
1826
  \fi\fi\fi
1827
}
1828
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
1829
\def\wordexample{example}
1830
\def\wordcode{code}
1831
 
1832
% Default is `distinct.'
1833
\kbdinputstyle distinct
1834
 
1835
\def\xkey{\key}
1836
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
1837
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
1838
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
1839
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
1840
 
1841
% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
1842
\let\url=\code
1843
\let\env=\code
1844
\let\command=\code
1845
 
1846
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
1847
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
1848
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
1849
% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
1850
% a hypertex \special here.
1851
%
1852
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
1853
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
1854
  \unsepspaces
1855
  \pdfurl{#1}%
1856
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1857
  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1858
    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
1859
  \else
1860
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1861
    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1862
      \ifpdf
1863
        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
1864
      \else
1865
        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
1866
      \fi
1867
    \else
1868
      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
1869
    \fi
1870
  \fi
1871
  \endlink
1872
\endgroup}
1873
 
1874
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
1875
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
1876
%
1877
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
1878
\ifpdf
1879
  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
1880
  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
1881
    \unsepspaces
1882
    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
1883
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1884
    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
1885
    \endlink
1886
  \endgroup}
1887
\else
1888
  \let\email=\uref
1889
\fi
1890
 
1891
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
1892
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
1893
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
1894
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
1895
%
1896
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
1897
 
1898
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
1899
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
1900
%
1901
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
1902
 
1903
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
1904
 
1905
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
1906
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
1907
% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
1908
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
1909
 
1910
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
1911
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
1912
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
1913
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
1914
 
1915
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
1916
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
1917
  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
1918
  \def\temp{#2}%
1919
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
1920
    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
1921
  \fi
1922
}
1923
 
1924
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which is in the CM italic font.
1925
%
1926
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
1927
 
1928
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
1929
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
1930
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
1931
%
1932
\def\registeredsymbol{%
1933
  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
1934
               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
1935
    }$%
1936
}
1937
 
1938
 
1939
\message{page headings,}
1940
 
1941
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
1942
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
1943
 
1944
% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
1945
\newif\ifseenauthor
1946
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
1947
 
1948
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
1949
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
1950
%
1951
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
1952
 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
1953
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
1954
 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
1955
 
1956
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
1957
        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
1958
 
1959
\envdef\titlepage{%
1960
  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
1961
  \begingroup
1962
    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
1963
    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
1964
    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
1965
    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
1966
    \finishedtitlepagetrue
1967
    %
1968
    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
1969
    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
1970
    \let\oldpage = \page
1971
    \def\page{%
1972
      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
1973
         \finishtitlepage
1974
      \fi
1975
      \let\page = \oldpage
1976
      \page
1977
      \null
1978
    }%
1979
}
1980
 
1981
\def\Etitlepage{%
1982
    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
1983
        \finishtitlepage
1984
    \fi
1985
    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
1986
    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
1987
    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
1988
    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
1989
    \oldpage
1990
  \endgroup
1991
  %
1992
  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
1993
  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
1994
  \HEADINGSon
1995
  %
1996
  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
1997
  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
1998
    \shortcontents
1999
    \contents
2000
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2001
    \global\let\contents = \relax
2002
  \fi
2003
  %
2004
  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2005
    \contents
2006
    \global\let\contents = \relax
2007
    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2008
  \fi
2009
}
2010
 
2011
\def\finishtitlepage{%
2012
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
2013
  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
2014
  \finishedtitlepagetrue
2015
}
2016
 
2017
%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
2018
 
2019
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
2020
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
2021
 
2022
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
2023
                \let\tt=\authortt}
2024
 
2025
\parseargdef\title{%
2026
  \checkenv\titlepage
2027
  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
2028
  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
2029
  \finishedtitlepagefalse
2030
  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
2031
}
2032
 
2033
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
2034
  \checkenv\titlepage
2035
  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
2036
}
2037
 
2038
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
2039
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
2040
%
2041
\parseargdef\author{%
2042
  \def\temp{\quotation}%
2043
  \ifx\thisenv\temp
2044
    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
2045
  \else
2046
    \checkenv\titlepage
2047
    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
2048
    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
2049
  \fi
2050
}
2051
 
2052
 
2053
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
2054
 
2055
\let\thispage=\folio
2056
 
2057
\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
2058
\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
2059
\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
2060
\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
2061
 
2062
% Now make TeX use those variables
2063
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
2064
                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
2065
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
2066
                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
2067
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
2068
 
2069
% Commands to set those variables.
2070
% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
2071
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
2072
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
2073
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
2074
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
2075
 
2076
 
2077
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
2078
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2079
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2080
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2081
 
2082
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
2083
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2084
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2085
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2086
 
2087
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
2088
 
2089
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
2090
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2091
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2092
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2093
 
2094
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
2095
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2096
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2097
  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
2098
  %
2099
  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
2100
  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
2101
  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
2102
  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
2103
}
2104
 
2105
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
2106
 
2107
 
2108
% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
2109
% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
2110
% @headings off         turns them off.
2111
% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
2112
% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2113
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2114
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
2115
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
2116
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
2117
 
2118
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
2119
 
2120
\def\HEADINGSoff{%
2121
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2122
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
2123
\HEADINGSoff
2124
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
2125
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
2126
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
2127
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
2128
% edge of all pages.
2129
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
2130
\global\pageno=1
2131
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2132
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2133
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2134
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2135
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2136
}
2137
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2138
 
2139
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
2140
% page number on top right.
2141
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
2142
\global\pageno=1
2143
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2144
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2145
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2146
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2147
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2148
}
2149
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
2150
 
2151
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
2152
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
2153
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
2154
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2155
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2156
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2157
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2158
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2159
}
2160
 
2161
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
2162
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
2163
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2164
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2165
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2166
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2167
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2168
}
2169
 
2170
% Subroutines used in generating headings
2171
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
2172
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
2173
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
2174
\ifx\today\undefined
2175
\def\today{%
2176
  \number\day\space
2177
  \ifcase\month
2178
  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
2179
  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
2180
  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
2181
  \fi
2182
  \space\number\year}
2183
\fi
2184
 
2185
% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
2186
% It generates no output of its own.
2187
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
2188
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
2189
 
2190
 
2191
\message{tables,}
2192
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
2193
 
2194
% default indentation of table text
2195
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
2196
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
2197
\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
2198
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
2199
\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
2200
 
2201
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
2202
\newdimen\itemmax
2203
 
2204
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
2205
% these defs.
2206
% They also define \itemindex
2207
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
2208
 
2209
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
2210
 
2211
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
2212
 
2213
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
2214
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
2215
 
2216
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
2217
  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
2218
  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
2219
  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
2220
  \itemindex{#1}%
2221
  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
2222
  %
2223
  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
2224
  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
2225
  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
2226
  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
2227
  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
2228
  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
2229
    %
2230
    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
2231
    % but leave it ragged-right.
2232
    \begingroup
2233
      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
2234
      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
2235
      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
2236
      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
2237
    \endgroup
2238
    %
2239
    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
2240
    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
2241
    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
2242
    %
2243
    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  (Unfortunately
2244
    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
2245
    % \baselineskip glue.)  However, if what follows is an environment
2246
    % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then
2247
    % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to
2248
    % crash together.  So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal
2249
    % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.
2250
    % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
2251
    % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
2252
    % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
2253
    % penalty 10001...)
2254
    \penalty 10001
2255
    \endgroup
2256
    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
2257
  \else
2258
    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
2259
    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
2260
    \noindent
2261
    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
2262
    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
2263
    % eventually be printed.
2264
    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
2265
    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
2266
    \unhbox0
2267
    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
2268
    \endgroup
2269
    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
2270
  \fi
2271
}
2272
 
2273
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
2274
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
2275
 
2276
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
2277
\envdef\table{%
2278
  \let\itemindex\gobble
2279
  \tablex
2280
}
2281
\envdef\ftable{%
2282
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
2283
  \tablex
2284
}
2285
\envdef\vtable{%
2286
  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
2287
  \tablex
2288
}
2289
\def\tablex#1{%
2290
  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
2291
  \parsearg\tabley
2292
}
2293
\def\tabley#1{%
2294
  {%
2295
    \makevalueexpandable
2296
    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
2297
    \expandafter
2298
  }\temp \endtablez
2299
}
2300
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
2301
  \aboveenvbreak
2302
  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
2303
  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
2304
  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
2305
  \itemmax=\tableindent
2306
  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
2307
  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
2308
  \exdentamount=\tableindent
2309
  \parindent = 0pt
2310
  \parskip = \smallskipamount
2311
  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2312
  \let\item = \internalBitem
2313
  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
2314
}
2315
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
2316
\let\Eftable\Etable
2317
\let\Evtable\Etable
2318
\let\Eitemize\Etable
2319
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
2320
 
2321
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
2322
 
2323
\newcount \itemno
2324
 
2325
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
2326
 
2327
\def\doitemize#1{%
2328
  \aboveenvbreak
2329
  \itemmax=\itemindent
2330
  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
2331
  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
2332
  \exdentamount=\itemindent
2333
  \parindent=0pt
2334
  \parskip=\smallskipamount
2335
  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2336
  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
2337
  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
2338
  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
2339
  \let\item=\itemizeitem
2340
}
2341
 
2342
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
2343
%
2344
\def\itemizeitem{%
2345
  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
2346
  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
2347
  {%
2348
   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
2349
   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
2350
   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
2351
   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
2352
   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
2353
   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
2354
   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
2355
   % that's the theory.
2356
   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
2357
   \noindent
2358
   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
2359
   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
2360
  \flushcr
2361
}
2362
 
2363
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
2364
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
2365
%
2366
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
2367
 
2368
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
2369
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
2370
% argument is the same as `1'.
2371
%
2372
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
2373
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
2374
  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
2375
  \def\thearg{#1}%
2376
  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
2377
  %
2378
  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
2379
  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
2380
  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
2381
  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
2382
  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
2383
  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
2384
  \ifx\rest\empty
2385
    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
2386
    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
2387
    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
2388
    %   not equal to itself.
2389
    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
2390
    %
2391
    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
2392
    % continuing to look for a <number>.
2393
    %
2394
    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
2395
      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
2396
    \else
2397
      % It's a letter.
2398
      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
2399
        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
2400
      \else
2401
        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
2402
      \fi
2403
    \fi
2404
  \else
2405
    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
2406
    \numericenumerate
2407
  \fi
2408
}
2409
 
2410
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
2411
% given in \thearg.
2412
%
2413
\def\numericenumerate{%
2414
  \itemno = \thearg
2415
  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
2416
}
2417
 
2418
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
2419
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
2420
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2421
  \startenumeration{%
2422
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2423
    \ifnum\itemno=0
2424
      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2425
                  alphabet}%
2426
    \fi
2427
    \char\lccode\itemno
2428
  }%
2429
}
2430
 
2431
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
2432
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
2433
  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2434
  \startenumeration{%
2435
    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2436
    \ifnum\itemno=0
2437
      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2438
                  alphabet}
2439
    \fi
2440
    \char\uccode\itemno
2441
  }%
2442
}
2443
 
2444
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2445
% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
2446
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
2447
%
2448
\def\startenumeration#1{%
2449
  \advance\itemno by -1
2450
  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
2451
}
2452
 
2453
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
2454
% to @enumerate.
2455
%
2456
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
2457
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
2458
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2459
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2460
 
2461
 
2462
% @multitable macros
2463
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
2464
%
2465
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
2466
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
2467
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
2468
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
2469
 
2470
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
2471
 
2472
% To make preamble:
2473
%
2474
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
2475
%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
2476
%   @item ...
2477
%
2478
%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
2479
%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
2480
%   columns as desired.
2481
 
2482
 
2483
% Or use a template:
2484
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2485
%   @item ...
2486
%   using the widest term desired in each column.
2487
 
2488
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
2489
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
2490
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
2491
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2492
 
2493
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
2494
% if they are.
2495
 
2496
% Sample multitable:
2497
 
2498
%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2499
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
2500
%   @item
2501
%   first col stuff
2502
%   @tab
2503
%   second col stuff
2504
%   @tab
2505
%   third col
2506
%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
2507
%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
2508
%
2509
%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
2510
%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
2511
%   @end multitable
2512
 
2513
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
2514
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
2515
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
2516
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
2517
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
2518
%                                                            to baseline.
2519
%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
2520
%
2521
\newskip\multitableparskip
2522
\newskip\multitableparindent
2523
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
2524
\newskip\multitablelinespace
2525
\multitableparskip=0pt
2526
\multitableparindent=6pt
2527
\multitablecolspace=12pt
2528
\multitablelinespace=0pt
2529
 
2530
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
2531
%
2532
\let\endsetuptable\relax
2533
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
2534
\let\columnfractions\relax
2535
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
2536
\newif\ifsetpercent
2537
 
2538
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
2539
% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
2540
%
2541
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
2542
  \global\advance\colcount by 1
2543
  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
2544
  \setuptable
2545
}
2546
 
2547
\newcount\colcount
2548
\def\setuptable#1{%
2549
  \def\firstarg{#1}%
2550
  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
2551
    \let\go = \relax
2552
  \else
2553
    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
2554
      \global\setpercenttrue
2555
    \else
2556
      \ifsetpercent
2557
         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
2558
      \else
2559
         \global\advance\colcount by 1
2560
         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
2561
                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2562
         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
2563
      \fi
2564
    \fi
2565
    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
2566
      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
2567
      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
2568
      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
2569
    \else
2570
      \let\go = \setuptable
2571
    \fi%
2572
  \fi
2573
  \go
2574
}
2575
 
2576
% multitable-only commands.
2577
%
2578
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
2579
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
2580
% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
2581
\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
2582
%
2583
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
2584
% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
2585
% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
2586
%                                       --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
2587
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
2588
 
2589
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
2590
%
2591
\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
2592
%
2593
\envdef\multitable{%
2594
  \vskip\parskip
2595
  \startsavinginserts
2596
  %
2597
  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
2598
  \let\item\crcr
2599
  %
2600
  \tolerance=9500
2601
  \hbadness=9500
2602
  \setmultitablespacing
2603
  \parskip=\multitableparskip
2604
  \parindent=\multitableparindent
2605
  \overfullrule=0pt
2606
  \global\colcount=0
2607
  %
2608
  \everycr = {%
2609
    \noalign{%
2610
      \global\everytab={}%
2611
      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
2612
      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
2613
      \checkinserts
2614
      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
2615
      %\filbreak
2616
        % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
2617
        % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
2618
        % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
2619
    }%
2620
  }%
2621
  %
2622
  \parsearg\domultitable
2623
}
2624
\def\domultitable#1{%
2625
  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
2626
  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
2627
  %
2628
  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
2629
  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
2630
  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
2631
  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
2632
  \halign\bgroup &%
2633
    \global\advance\colcount by 1
2634
    \multistrut
2635
    \vtop{%
2636
      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
2637
      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
2638
      %
2639
      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
2640
      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
2641
      % the first one.
2642
      %
2643
      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
2644
      % to the width of each template entry.
2645
      %
2646
      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
2647
      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
2648
      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
2649
      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
2650
      %
2651
      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
2652
      \rightskip=0pt
2653
      \ifnum\colcount=1
2654
        % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
2655
        \advance\hsize by\leftskip
2656
      \else
2657
        \ifsetpercent \else
2658
          % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
2659
          % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
2660
          \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
2661
        \fi
2662
       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
2663
      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
2664
      \fi
2665
      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
2666
      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
2667
      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
2668
      % For example:
2669
      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
2670
      % @item @code{#}
2671
      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
2672
      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
2673
      % marking characters.
2674
      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
2675
    }\cr
2676
}
2677
\def\Emultitable{%
2678
  \crcr
2679
  \egroup % end the \halign
2680
  \global\setpercentfalse
2681
}
2682
 
2683
\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
2684
% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
2685
% current baselineskip.
2686
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
2687
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
2688
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
2689
%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
2690
%% to keep lines equally spaced
2691
\let\multistrut = \strut
2692
\else
2693
%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
2694
\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
2695
width0pt\relax} \fi
2696
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
2697
%% table. If not, do nothing.
2698
%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
2699
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
2700
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2701
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2702
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2703
\fi%
2704
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
2705
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2706
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2707
                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2708
\fi}
2709
 
2710
 
2711
\message{conditionals,}
2712
 
2713
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
2714
% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
2715
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
2716
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
2717
% attempt to close an environment group.
2718
%
2719
\def\makecond#1{%
2720
  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
2721
  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
2722
}
2723
\makecond{iftex}
2724
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
2725
\makecond{ifnothtml}
2726
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
2727
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
2728
\makecond{ifnotxml}
2729
 
2730
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
2731
%
2732
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
2733
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
2734
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
2735
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
2736
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
2737
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
2738
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
2739
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
2740
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
2741
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
2742
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
2743
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
2744
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
2745
 
2746
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
2747
%
2748
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
2749
\newcount\doignorecount
2750
 
2751
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
2752
  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
2753
  \catcode`\@ = \other
2754
  \catcode`\{ = \other
2755
  \catcode`\} = \other
2756
  %
2757
  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
2758
  \spaceisspace
2759
  %
2760
  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
2761
  \doignorecount = 0
2762
  %
2763
  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
2764
  \dodoignore {#1}%
2765
}
2766
 
2767
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
2768
  \obeylines %
2769
  %
2770
  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
2771
    % #1 contains the string `ifinfo'.
2772
    %
2773
    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line
2774
    % by itself.
2775
    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
2776
    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
2777
    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
2778
    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
2779
    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
2780
    %
2781
    % And now expand that command.
2782
    \obeylines %
2783
    \doignoretext ^^M%
2784
  }%
2785
}
2786
 
2787
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
2788
  \def\temp{#1}%
2789
  \ifx\temp\empty                       % Nothing found.
2790
    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
2791
  \else                                 % Found a nested condition, ...
2792
    \advance\doignorecount by 1
2793
    \let\next\doignoretextyyy           % ..., look for another.
2794
    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
2795
  \fi
2796
  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
2797
}
2798
 
2799
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
2800
%
2801
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
2802
  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0      % We have just found the outermost @end.
2803
    \let\next\enddoignore
2804
  \else                         % Still inside a nested condition.
2805
    \advance\doignorecount by -1
2806
    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
2807
  \fi
2808
  \next
2809
}
2810
 
2811
% Finish off ignored text.
2812
\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
2813
 
2814
 
2815
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
2816
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
2817
%
2818
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
2819
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
2820
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
2821
% didn't need it.
2822
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
2823
%
2824
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
2825
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
2826
  {%
2827
    \makevalueexpandable
2828
    \def\temp{#2}%
2829
    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
2830
    \ifx\temp\empty
2831
      \next{}%
2832
    \else
2833
      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
2834
    \fi
2835
  }%
2836
}
2837
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
2838
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
2839
 
2840
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
2841
%
2842
\parseargdef\clear{%
2843
  {%
2844
    \makevalueexpandable
2845
    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
2846
  }%
2847
}
2848
 
2849
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
2850
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
2851
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
2852
{
2853
  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
2854
  %
2855
  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
2856
    \let\value = \expandablevalue
2857
    % We don't want these characters active, ...
2858
    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
2859
    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
2860
    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
2861
    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
2862
    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
2863
  }
2864
}
2865
 
2866
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
2867
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
2868
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
2869
% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
2870
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
2871
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
2872
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
2873
%
2874
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
2875
  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2876
    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
2877
    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
2878
  \else
2879
    \csname SET#1\endcsname
2880
  \fi
2881
}
2882
 
2883
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
2884
% with @set.
2885
%
2886
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
2887
%
2888
\makecond{ifset}
2889
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
2890
\def\doifset#1#2{%
2891
  {%
2892
    \makevalueexpandable
2893
    \let\next=\empty
2894
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
2895
      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
2896
    \fi
2897
    \expandafter
2898
  }\next
2899
}
2900
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
2901
 
2902
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
2903
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
2904
%
2905
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
2906
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
2907
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
2908
%
2909
\makecond{ifclear}
2910
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
2911
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
2912
 
2913
% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
2914
% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
2915
\let\dircategory=\comment
2916
 
2917
% @defininfoenclose.
2918
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
2919
 
2920
 
2921
\message{indexing,}
2922
% Index generation facilities
2923
 
2924
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
2925
% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
2926
{\catcode`\@=11
2927
\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
2928
 
2929
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
2930
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
2931
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
2932
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
2933
% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
2934
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
2935
% for the sake of vms.
2936
%
2937
\def\newindex#1{%
2938
  \iflinks
2939
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
2940
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
2941
  \fi
2942
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
2943
    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
2944
}
2945
 
2946
% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
2947
%
2948
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
2949
 
2950
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
2951
%
2952
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
2953
%
2954
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
2955
  \iflinks
2956
    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
2957
    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
2958
  \fi
2959
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
2960
    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
2961
}
2962
 
2963
 
2964
% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
2965
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
2966
%
2967
% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
2968
% inside @code.
2969
%
2970
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
2971
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
2972
 
2973
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
2974
% #3 the target index (bar).
2975
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
2976
  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
2977
  % closing the target index.
2978
  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
2979
    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
2980
    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
2981
    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
2982
    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
2983
  \fi
2984
  % redefine \fooindfile:
2985
  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
2986
  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
2987
  % redefine \fooindex:
2988
  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
2989
}
2990
 
2991
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
2992
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
2993
%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
2994
 
2995
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
2996
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
2997
 
2998
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
2999
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
3000
 
3001
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
3002
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
3003
 
3004
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
3005
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
3006
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
3007
 
3008
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
3009
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
3010
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
3011
%
3012
\def\indexdummies{%
3013
  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
3014
  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
3015
  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
3016
  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
3017
  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
3018
  \let\{ = \mylbrace
3019
  \let\} = \myrbrace
3020
  %
3021
  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
3022
  % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control
3023
  % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
3024
  % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
3025
  % from whatever follows.
3026
  %
3027
  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
3028
  % space.
3029
  %
3030
  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
3031
  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
3032
  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
3033
  %
3034
  \def\definedummyword##1{%
3035
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
3036
  }%
3037
  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3038
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
3039
  }%
3040
  %
3041
  % Do the redefinitions.
3042
  \commondummies
3043
}
3044
 
3045
% For the aux file, @ is the escape character.  So we want to redefine
3046
% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash.  When everything uses
3047
% @, this will be simpler.
3048
%
3049
\def\atdummies{%
3050
  \def\@{@@}%
3051
  \def\ {@ }%
3052
  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
3053
  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
3054
  %
3055
  % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
3056
  \def\definedummyword##1{%
3057
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
3058
  }%
3059
  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3060
    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
3061
  }%
3062
  %
3063
  % Do the redefinitions.
3064
  \commondummies
3065
}
3066
 
3067
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and
3068
% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
3069
%
3070
\def\commondummies{%
3071
  %
3072
  \normalturnoffactive
3073
  %
3074
  \commondummiesnofonts
3075
  %
3076
  \definedummyletter{_}%
3077
  %
3078
  % Non-English letters.
3079
  \definedummyword{AA}%
3080
  \definedummyword{AE}%
3081
  \definedummyword{L}%
3082
  \definedummyword{OE}%
3083
  \definedummyword{O}%
3084
  \definedummyword{aa}%
3085
  \definedummyword{ae}%
3086
  \definedummyword{l}%
3087
  \definedummyword{oe}%
3088
  \definedummyword{o}%
3089
  \definedummyword{ss}%
3090
  \definedummyword{exclamdown}%
3091
  \definedummyword{questiondown}%
3092
  \definedummyword{ordf}%
3093
  \definedummyword{ordm}%
3094
  %
3095
  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
3096
  \definedummyword{bf}%
3097
  \definedummyword{gtr}%
3098
  \definedummyword{hat}%
3099
  \definedummyword{less}%
3100
  \definedummyword{sf}%
3101
  \definedummyword{sl}%
3102
  \definedummyword{tclose}%
3103
  \definedummyword{tt}%
3104
  %
3105
  \definedummyword{LaTeX}%
3106
  \definedummyword{TeX}%
3107
  %
3108
  % Assorted special characters.
3109
  \definedummyword{bullet}%
3110
  \definedummyword{copyright}%
3111
  \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}%
3112
  \definedummyword{dots}%
3113
  \definedummyword{enddots}%
3114
  \definedummyword{equiv}%
3115
  \definedummyword{error}%
3116
  \definedummyword{expansion}%
3117
  \definedummyword{minus}%
3118
  \definedummyword{pounds}%
3119
  \definedummyword{point}%
3120
  \definedummyword{print}%
3121
  \definedummyword{result}%
3122
  %
3123
  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
3124
  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
3125
  \makevalueexpandable
3126
  %
3127
  % Normal spaces, not active ones.
3128
  \unsepspaces
3129
  %
3130
  % No macro expansion.
3131
  \turnoffmacros
3132
}
3133
 
3134
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
3135
%
3136
% Better have this without active chars.
3137
{
3138
  \catcode`\~=\other
3139
  \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{%
3140
    % Control letters and accents.
3141
    \definedummyletter{!}%
3142
    \definedummyletter{"}%
3143
    \definedummyletter{'}%
3144
    \definedummyletter{*}%
3145
    \definedummyletter{,}%
3146
    \definedummyletter{.}%
3147
    \definedummyletter{/}%
3148
    \definedummyletter{:}%
3149
    \definedummyletter{=}%
3150
    \definedummyletter{?}%
3151
    \definedummyletter{^}%
3152
    \definedummyletter{`}%
3153
    \definedummyletter{~}%
3154
    \definedummyword{u}%
3155
    \definedummyword{v}%
3156
    \definedummyword{H}%
3157
    \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
3158
    \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
3159
    \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
3160
    \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
3161
    \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
3162
    \definedummyword{dotless}%
3163
    %
3164
    % Texinfo font commands.
3165
    \definedummyword{b}%
3166
    \definedummyword{i}%
3167
    \definedummyword{r}%
3168
    \definedummyword{sc}%
3169
    \definedummyword{t}%
3170
    %
3171
    % Commands that take arguments.
3172
    \definedummyword{acronym}%
3173
    \definedummyword{cite}%
3174
    \definedummyword{code}%
3175
    \definedummyword{command}%
3176
    \definedummyword{dfn}%
3177
    \definedummyword{emph}%
3178
    \definedummyword{env}%
3179
    \definedummyword{file}%
3180
    \definedummyword{kbd}%
3181
    \definedummyword{key}%
3182
    \definedummyword{math}%
3183
    \definedummyword{option}%
3184
    \definedummyword{samp}%
3185
    \definedummyword{strong}%
3186
    \definedummyword{tie}%
3187
    \definedummyword{uref}%
3188
    \definedummyword{url}%
3189
    \definedummyword{var}%
3190
    \definedummyword{verb}%
3191
    \definedummyword{w}%
3192
  }
3193
}
3194
 
3195
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
3196
% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
3197
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
3198
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
3199
%
3200
\def\indexnofonts{%
3201
  \def\definedummyword##1{%
3202
    \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis
3203
  }%
3204
  \let\definedummyletter=\definedummyword
3205
  %
3206
  \commondummiesnofonts
3207
  %
3208
  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
3209
  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
3210
  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
3211
  %\let\tt=\asis
3212
  %
3213
  \def\ { }%
3214
  \def\@{@}%
3215
  % how to handle braces?
3216
  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
3217
  %
3218
  % Non-English letters.
3219
  \def\AA{AA}%
3220
  \def\AE{AE}%
3221
  \def\L{L}%
3222
  \def\OE{OE}%
3223
  \def\O{O}%
3224
  \def\aa{aa}%
3225
  \def\ae{ae}%
3226
  \def\l{l}%
3227
  \def\oe{oe}%
3228
  \def\o{o}%
3229
  \def\ss{ss}%
3230
  \def\exclamdown{!}%
3231
  \def\questiondown{?}%
3232
  \def\ordf{a}%
3233
  \def\ordm{o}%
3234
  %
3235
  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
3236
  \def\TeX{TeX}%
3237
  %
3238
  % Assorted special characters.
3239
  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
3240
  \def\bullet{bullet}%
3241
  \def\copyright{copyright}%
3242
  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
3243
  \def\dots{...}%
3244
  \def\enddots{...}%
3245
  \def\equiv{==}%
3246
  \def\error{error}%
3247
  \def\expansion{==>}%
3248
  \def\minus{-}%
3249
  \def\pounds{pounds}%
3250
  \def\point{.}%
3251
  \def\print{-|}%
3252
  \def\result{=>}%
3253
}
3254
 
3255
\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
3256
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
3257
 
3258
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
3259
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
3260
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
3261
 
3262
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
3263
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
3264
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
3265
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
3266
%
3267
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
3268
  \iflinks
3269
  {%
3270
    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
3271
    \toks0 = {#2}%
3272
    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
3273
    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
3274
    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
3275
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
3276
    \fi
3277
    %
3278
    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
3279
    %
3280
    \ifvmode
3281
      \dosubindsanitize
3282
    \else
3283
      \dosubindwrite
3284
    \fi
3285
  }%
3286
  \fi
3287
}
3288
 
3289
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
3290
%
3291
\def\dosubindwrite{%
3292
  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
3293
  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
3294
    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
3295
  \fi
3296
  %
3297
  % Remember, we are within a group.
3298
  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
3299
  \escapechar=`\\
3300
  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
3301
      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
3302
  %
3303
  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
3304
  % get the string to sort by.
3305
  {\indexnofonts
3306
   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
3307
   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
3308
  }%
3309
  %
3310
  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
3311
  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
3312
  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
3313
  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
3314
  % sorted result.
3315
  \edef\temp{%
3316
    \write\writeto{%
3317
      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
3318
  }%
3319
  \temp
3320
}
3321
 
3322
% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
3323
%
3324
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
3325
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
3326
% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
3327
% \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
3328
% like this:
3329
% @end defun
3330
% @tindex whatever
3331
% @defun ...
3332
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
3333
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
3334
% the previous defun.
3335
%
3336
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
3337
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
3338
%
3339
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
3340
%
3341
% But wait, there is a catch there:
3342
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
3343
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
3344
% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
3345
% representation of the skip.
3346
%
3347
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
3348
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
3349
%
3350
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
3351
%
3352
% ..., ready, GO:
3353
%
3354
\def\dosubindsanitize{%
3355
  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
3356
  \skip0 = \lastskip
3357
  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
3358
  \count255 = \lastpenalty
3359
  %
3360
  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
3361
  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
3362
  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
3363
  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
3364
  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
3365
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3366
  \else
3367
    \vskip-\skip0
3368
  \fi
3369
  %
3370
  \dosubindwrite
3371
  %
3372
  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3373
    % if \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a
3374
    % penalty, and perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.
3375
    % In that case, we want to re-insert the penalty; since we
3376
    % just inserted a non-discardable item, any following glue
3377
    % (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
3378
    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
3379
    %   @vindex index-whatever
3380
    %   Description.
3381
    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
3382
    % and the "Description." paragraph.
3383
    \ifnum\count255>9999 \nobreak \fi
3384
  \else
3385
    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
3386
    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
3387
    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
3388
    \nobreak\vskip\skip0
3389
  \fi
3390
}
3391
 
3392
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
3393
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
3394
% or
3395
%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
3396
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
3397
% containing these kinds of lines:
3398
%  \initial {c}
3399
%     before the first topic whose initial is c
3400
%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
3401
%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
3402
%  \primary {topic}
3403
%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
3404
%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
3405
%     for each subtopic.
3406
 
3407
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
3408
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
3409
 
3410
\def\findex {\fnindex}
3411
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
3412
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
3413
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
3414
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
3415
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
3416
 
3417
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
3418
{\obeylines %
3419
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
3420
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
3421
 
3422
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
3423
 
3424
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
3425
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
3426
%
3427
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
3428
  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
3429
  %
3430
  \smallfonts \rm
3431
  \tolerance = 9500
3432
  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
3433
  %
3434
  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
3435
  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
3436
  % \initial {@}
3437
  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
3438
  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
3439
  \catcode`\@ = 11
3440
  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
3441
  \ifeof 1
3442
    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
3443
    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
3444
    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
3445
    % there is some text.
3446
    \putwordIndexNonexistent
3447
  \else
3448
    %
3449
    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
3450
    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
3451
    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
3452
    \read 1 to \temp
3453
    \ifeof 1
3454
      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
3455
    \else
3456
      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
3457
      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
3458
      % to make right now.
3459
      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
3460
      \catcode`\\ = 0
3461
      \escapechar = `\\
3462
      \begindoublecolumns
3463
      \input \jobname.#1s
3464
      \enddoublecolumns
3465
    \fi
3466
  \fi
3467
  \closein 1
3468
\endgroup}
3469
 
3470
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
3471
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
3472
 
3473
\def\initial#1{{%
3474
  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
3475
  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
3476
  %
3477
  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
3478
  \removelastskip
3479
  %
3480
  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
3481
  \penalty -300
3482
  %
3483
  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
3484
  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
3485
  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
3486
  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
3487
  %
3488
  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
3489
  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
3490
  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
3491
  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
3492
  %
3493
  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
3494
  \nobreak
3495
}}
3496
 
3497
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
3498
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
3499
% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
3500
%
3501
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
3502
%       \def\entry#1#2{...
3503
% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
3504
% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
3505
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
3506
%
3507
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
3508
%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
3509
\def\entry{%
3510
  \begingroup
3511
    %
3512
    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
3513
    % affect previous text.
3514
    \par
3515
    %
3516
    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
3517
    \parfillskip = 0in
3518
    %
3519
    % No extra space above this paragraph.
3520
    \parskip = 0in
3521
    %
3522
    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
3523
    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
3524
    %
3525
    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
3526
    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
3527
    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
3528
    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
3529
    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
3530
    %
3531
    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
3532
    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
3533
    \hangindent = 2em
3534
    %
3535
    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
3536
    % with blank space.
3537
    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
3538
    %
3539
    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
3540
    % columns.
3541
    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
3542
    %
3543
    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
3544
    \afterassignment\doentry
3545
    \let\temp =
3546
}
3547
\def\doentry{%
3548
    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
3549
      \noindent
3550
      \aftergroup\finishentry
3551
      % And now comes the text of the entry.
3552
}
3553
\def\finishentry#1{%
3554
    % #1 is the page number.
3555
    %
3556
    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
3557
    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
3558
    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
3559
    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
3560
    \def\tempb{#1}%
3561
    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
3562
    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
3563
    \ifx\tempc\tempd
3564
      \ %
3565
    \else
3566
      %
3567
      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
3568
      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
3569
      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
3570
      \hfil\penalty50
3571
      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
3572
      %
3573
      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
3574
      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
3575
      % \hbox ensues.
3576
      \ifpdf
3577
        \pdfgettoks#1.%
3578
        \ \the\toksA
3579
      \else
3580
        \ #1%
3581
      \fi
3582
    \fi
3583
    \par
3584
  \endgroup
3585
}
3586
 
3587
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
3588
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
3589
  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
3590
 
3591
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
3592
 
3593
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
3594
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
3595
  \parfillskip=0in
3596
  \parskip=0in
3597
  \hangindent=1in
3598
  \hangafter=1
3599
  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
3600
  \ifpdf
3601
    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
3602
  \else
3603
    #2
3604
  \fi
3605
  \par
3606
}}
3607
 
3608
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
3609
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
3610
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
3611
\catcode`\@=11
3612
 
3613
\newbox\partialpage
3614
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
3615
 
3616
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
3617
  % Grab any single-column material above us.
3618
  \output = {%
3619
    %
3620
    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
3621
    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
3622
    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
3623
    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
3624
    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
3625
    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
3626
    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
3627
    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
3628
      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
3629
    \fi
3630
    %
3631
    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
3632
      % Unvbox the main output page.
3633
      \unvbox\PAGE
3634
      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
3635
    }%
3636
  }%
3637
  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
3638
  %
3639
  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
3640
  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
3641
  %
3642
  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
3643
  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
3644
  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
3645
  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
3646
  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
3647
  %
3648
  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
3649
  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
3650
  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
3651
  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
3652
  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
3653
  %
3654
  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
3655
  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
3656
  % been clobbered.
3657
  %
3658
  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
3659
    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
3660
    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
3661
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3662
  %
3663
  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
3664
  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
3665
  \vsize = 2\vsize
3666
}
3667
 
3668
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
3669
% the last.
3670
%
3671
\def\doublecolumnout{%
3672
  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
3673
  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
3674
  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
3675
  % previous page.
3676
  \dimen@ = \vsize
3677
  \divide\dimen@ by 2
3678
  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
3679
  %
3680
  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
3681
  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
3682
  \onepageout\pagesofar
3683
  \unvbox255
3684
  \penalty\outputpenalty
3685
}
3686
%
3687
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
3688
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
3689
\def\pagesofar{%
3690
  \unvbox\partialpage
3691
  %
3692
  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3693
  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
3694
  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
3695
}
3696
%
3697
% All done with double columns.
3698
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
3699
  \output = {%
3700
    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
3701
    % current page, no automatic page break.
3702
    \balancecolumns
3703
    %
3704
    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
3705
    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
3706
    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
3707
    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
3708
    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
3709
    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
3710
    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
3711
    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
3712
  }%
3713
  \eject
3714
  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
3715
  %
3716
  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
3717
  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
3718
  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
3719
  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
3720
  \pagegoal = \vsize
3721
}
3722
%
3723
% Called at the end of the double column material.
3724
\def\balancecolumns{%
3725
  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
3726
  \dimen@ = \ht0
3727
  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
3728
  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
3729
  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
3730
  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
3731
  \splittopskip = \topskip
3732
  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
3733
  {%
3734
    \vbadness = 10000
3735
    \loop
3736
      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
3737
      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
3738
    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
3739
      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
3740
    \repeat
3741
  }%
3742
  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
3743
  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
3744
  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
3745
  %
3746
  \pagesofar
3747
}
3748
\catcode`\@ = \other
3749
 
3750
 
3751
\message{sectioning,}
3752
% Chapters, sections, etc.
3753
 
3754
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
3755
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
3756
% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
3757
% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
3758
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
3759
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
3760
\newcount\chapno
3761
\newcount\secno        \secno=0
3762
\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
3763
\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
3764
 
3765
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
3766
\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
3767
%
3768
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
3769
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
3770
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
3771
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
3772
%
3773
\def\appendixletter{%
3774
  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
3775
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
3776
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
3777
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
3778
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
3779
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
3780
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
3781
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
3782
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
3783
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
3784
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
3785
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
3786
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
3787
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
3788
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
3789
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
3790
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
3791
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
3792
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
3793
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
3794
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
3795
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
3796
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
3797
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
3798
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
3799
  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
3800
  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
3801
  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
3802
  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
3803
  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
3804
  \else\char\the\appendixno
3805
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
3806
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
3807
 
3808
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
3809
% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
3810
% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
3811
\def\thischapter{}
3812
\def\thissection{}
3813
 
3814
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
3815
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
3816
 
3817
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
3818
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
3819
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
3820
 
3821
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
3822
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
3823
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
3824
 
3825
% Choose a numbered-heading macro
3826
% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
3827
% #2 is text for heading
3828
\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3829
\ifcase\absseclevel
3830
      \chapterzzz{#2}%
3831
  \or \seczzz{#2}%
3832
  \or \numberedsubseczzz{#2}%
3833
  \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}%
3834
  \else
3835
    \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \chapterzzz{#2}%
3836
    \else \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}%
3837
    \fi
3838
  \fi
3839
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
3840
}
3841
 
3842
% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
3843
\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3844
\ifcase\absseclevel
3845
      \appendixzzz{#2}%
3846
  \or \appendixsectionzzz{#2}%
3847
  \or \appendixsubseczzz{#2}%
3848
  \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}%
3849
  \else
3850
    \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \appendixzzz{#2}%
3851
    \else \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}%
3852
    \fi
3853
  \fi
3854
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
3855
}
3856
 
3857
% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
3858
\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3859
  \ifcase\absseclevel
3860
      \unnumberedzzz{#2}%
3861
  \or \unnumberedseczzz{#2}%
3862
  \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}%
3863
  \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}%
3864
  \else
3865
    \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \unnumberedzzz{#2}%
3866
    \else \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}%
3867
    \fi
3868
  \fi
3869
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
3870
}
3871
 
3872
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
3873
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
3874
%
3875
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
3876
% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
3877
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
3878
%
3879
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
3880
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
3881
  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
3882
  % as an @include file.
3883
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
3884
    \global\advance\chapno by 1
3885
  %
3886
  % Used for \float.
3887
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
3888
  \resetallfloatnos
3889
  %
3890
  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
3891
  %
3892
  % Write the actual heading.
3893
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
3894
  %
3895
  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
3896
  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
3897
  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
3898
  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
3899
}
3900
 
3901
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
3902
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
3903
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
3904
    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
3905
  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
3906
  \resetallfloatnos
3907
  %
3908
  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
3909
  \message{\appendixnum}%
3910
  %
3911
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
3912
  %
3913
  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
3914
  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
3915
  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
3916
}
3917
 
3918
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
3919
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{{\unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
3920
 
3921
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
3922
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
3923
  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
3924
    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
3925
  %
3926
  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
3927
  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
3928
  \resetallfloatnos
3929
  %
3930
  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
3931
  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
3932
  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
3933
  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
3934
  % to be executed, not expanded).
3935
  %
3936
  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
3937
  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
3938
  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
3939
  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
3940
  % the toc entries.)
3941
  \toks0 = {#1}%
3942
  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
3943
  %
3944
  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
3945
  %
3946
  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
3947
  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
3948
  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
3949
}
3950
 
3951
% @top is like @unnumbered.
3952
\let\top\unnumbered
3953
 
3954
% Sections.
3955
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
3956
\def\seczzz#1{%
3957
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
3958
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
3959
}
3960
 
3961
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
3962
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
3963
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
3964
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
3965
}
3966
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
3967
 
3968
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
3969
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
3970
  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
3971
  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
3972
}
3973
 
3974
% Subsections.
3975
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
3976
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
3977
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
3978
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
3979
}
3980
 
3981
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
3982
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
3983
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
3984
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
3985
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
3986
}
3987
 
3988
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
3989
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
3990
  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
3991
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
3992
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
3993
}
3994
 
3995
% Subsubsections.
3996
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
3997
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
3998
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
3999
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
4000
                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4001
}
4002
 
4003
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
4004
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
4005
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4006
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
4007
                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4008
}
4009
 
4010
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
4011
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4012
  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4013
  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
4014
                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4015
}
4016
 
4017
% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
4018
% Actually, they are now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
4019
\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
4020
\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
4021
\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
4022
\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
4023
\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
4024
 
4025
\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
4026
\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
4027
\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
4028
\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
4029
 
4030
\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
4031
\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
4032
\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
4033
\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
4034
 
4035
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
4036
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
4037
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
4038
\let\section = \numberedsec
4039
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4040
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4041
 
4042
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
4043
 
4044
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
4045
%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
4046
%          overlong headings to fold.
4047
%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
4048
%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
4049
%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
4050
%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
4051
 
4052
 
4053
\def\majorheading{%
4054
  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
4055
  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
4056
}
4057
 
4058
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
4059
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
4060
  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4061
                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4062
                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
4063
  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
4064
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4065
}
4066
 
4067
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
4068
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4069
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4070
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4071
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4072
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4073
  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4074
 
4075
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
4076
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
4077
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
4078
 
4079
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
4080
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
4081
 
4082
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
4083
 
4084
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
4085
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
4086
 
4087
\newskip\chapheadingskip
4088
 
4089
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
4090
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
4091
\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
4092
 
4093
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
4094
 
4095
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
4096
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4097
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
4098
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
4099
 
4100
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
4101
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4102
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
4103
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
4104
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
4105
 
4106
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
4107
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
4108
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
4109
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
4110
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
4111
 
4112
\CHAPPAGon
4113
 
4114
\def\CHAPFplain{%
4115
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
4116
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
4117
 
4118
% Normal chapter opening.
4119
%
4120
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
4121
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
4122
%
4123
% To test against our argument.
4124
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
4125
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
4126
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
4127
%
4128
\def\chfplain#1#2#3{%
4129
  \pchapsepmacro
4130
  {%
4131
    \chapfonts \rm
4132
    %
4133
    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
4134
    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
4135
    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
4136
    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4137
    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
4138
    %
4139
    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
4140
    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
4141
    \def\temptype{#2}%
4142
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4143
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4144
      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
4145
      \def\thischapter{#1}%
4146
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4147
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
4148
      \def\toctype{omit}%
4149
      \xdef\thischapter{}%
4150
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4151
      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
4152
      \def\toctype{app}%
4153
      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
4154
      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
4155
      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
4156
      %
4157
      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
4158
                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4159
    \else
4160
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
4161
      \def\toctype{numchap}%
4162
      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
4163
                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4164
    \fi\fi\fi
4165
    %
4166
    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
4167
    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
4168
    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
4169
    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
4170
    %
4171
    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
4172
    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
4173
    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
4174
    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
4175
    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
4176
    \donoderef{#2}%
4177
    %
4178
    % Typeset the actual heading.
4179
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4180
          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
4181
          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
4182
  }%
4183
  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
4184
  \nobreak
4185
}
4186
 
4187
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
4188
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4189
\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
4190
  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
4191
    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
4192
    \leftskip = \rightskip
4193
    \parfillskip = 0pt
4194
  }%
4195
  \chfplain{#1}{Ynothing}{}%
4196
}}
4197
 
4198
\CHAPFplain % The default
4199
 
4200
% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
4201
% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
4202
%
4203
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
4204
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4205
                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4206
                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4207
}
4208
 
4209
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
4210
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
4211
\par\penalty 5000 %
4212
}
4213
 
4214
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
4215
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4216
                       \parindent=0pt
4217
                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4218
}
4219
 
4220
\def\CHAPFopen{%
4221
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
4222
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
4223
 
4224
 
4225
% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
4226
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
4227
%
4228
\newskip\secheadingskip
4229
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
4230
 
4231
% Subsection titles.
4232
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
4233
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
4234
 
4235
% Subsubsection titles.
4236
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
4237
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
4238
 
4239
 
4240
% Print any size, any type, section title.
4241
%
4242
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
4243
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
4244
% section number.
4245
%
4246
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
4247
  {%
4248
    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
4249
    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
4250
    %
4251
    % Insert space above the heading.
4252
    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
4253
    %
4254
    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
4255
    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
4256
    \def\temptype{#3}%
4257
    %
4258
    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4259
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4260
      \def\toctype{unn}%
4261
      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4262
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4263
      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
4264
      % and don't redefine \thissection.
4265
      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4266
      \def\toctype{omit}%
4267
      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
4268
    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4269
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4270
      \def\toctype{app}%
4271
      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4272
    \else
4273
      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4274
      \def\toctype{num}%
4275
      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4276
    \fi\fi\fi
4277
    %
4278
    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chfplain.
4279
    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
4280
    %
4281
    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
4282
    % Again, see comments in \chfplain.
4283
    \donoderef{#3}%
4284
    %
4285
    % Output the actual section heading.
4286
    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4287
          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
4288
          \unhbox0 #1}%
4289
  }%
4290
  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
4291
  % Don't allow stretch, though.
4292
  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
4293
  %
4294
  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
4295
  % was followed by glue.
4296
  \nobreak
4297
  %
4298
  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
4299
  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
4300
  % discardable item.)
4301
  \vskip-\parskip
4302
  %
4303
  % This \nobreak is purely so the last item on the list is a \penalty
4304
  % of 10000.  This is so other code, for instance \parsebodycommon, can
4305
  % check for and avoid allowing breakpoints.  Otherwise, it would
4306
  % insert a valid breakpoint between:
4307
  %   @section sec-whatever
4308
  %   @deffn def-whatever
4309
  \nobreak
4310
}
4311
 
4312
 
4313
\message{toc,}
4314
% Table of contents.
4315
\newwrite\tocfile
4316
 
4317
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
4318
% Called from @chapter, etc.
4319
%
4320
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
4321
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
4322
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
4323
% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
4324
% destination to jump to.
4325
%
4326
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
4327
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
4328
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
4329
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
4330
%
4331
\newif\iftocfileopened
4332
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
4333
%
4334
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
4335
  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
4336
  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
4337
    \iftocfileopened\else
4338
      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
4339
      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
4340
    \fi
4341
    %
4342
    \iflinks
4343
      \toks0 = {#2}%
4344
      \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}%
4345
      \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}%
4346
                               {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
4347
      \temp
4348
    \fi
4349
  \fi
4350
  %
4351
  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
4352
  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
4353
  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
4354
  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
4355
  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
4356
  % `1', and two named `2'.
4357
  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
4358
}
4359
 
4360
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
4361
\newcount\savepageno
4362
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
4363
 
4364
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
4365
%
4366
\def\startcontents#1{%
4367
  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
4368
  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
4369
  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
4370
  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
4371
  \contentsalignmacro
4372
  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
4373
  %
4374
  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
4375
  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
4376
  \def\thischapter{}%
4377
  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
4378
  %
4379
  \savepageno = \pageno
4380
  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
4381
    \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
4382
    % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
4383
    % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
4384
    %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
4385
    \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
4386
    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
4387
    %
4388
    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
4389
    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
4390
}
4391
 
4392
 
4393
% Normal (long) toc.
4394
\def\contents{%
4395
  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
4396
    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4397
    \ifeof 1 \else
4398
      \input \jobname.toc
4399
    \fi
4400
    \vfill \eject
4401
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4402
    \ifeof 1 \else
4403
      \pdfmakeoutlines
4404
    \fi
4405
    \closein 1
4406
  \endgroup
4407
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4408
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4409
}
4410
 
4411
% And just the chapters.
4412
\def\summarycontents{%
4413
  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
4414
    %
4415
    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
4416
    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
4417
    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
4418
    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
4419
    \secfonts
4420
    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
4421
    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
4422
    \rm
4423
    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
4424
    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
4425
    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
4426
    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
4427
    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
4428
    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4429
    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4430
    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4431
    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4432
    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4433
    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4434
    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4435
    \ifeof 1 \else
4436
      \input \jobname.toc
4437
    \fi
4438
    \closein 1
4439
    \vfill \eject
4440
    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4441
  \endgroup
4442
  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4443
  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4444
}
4445
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
4446
 
4447
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
4448
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
4449
%
4450
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
4451
  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
4452
  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
4453
  % But use \hss just in case.
4454
  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
4455
  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
4456
  %
4457
  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
4458
  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
4459
  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
4460
  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
4461
  % there are before deciding ...
4462
  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
4463
}
4464
 
4465
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
4466
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
4467
% The last argument is the page number.
4468
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
4469
 
4470
% Chapters, in the main contents.
4471
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4472
%
4473
% Chapters, in the short toc.
4474
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
4475
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
4476
  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
4477
}
4478
 
4479
% Appendices, in the main contents.
4480
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
4481
%
4482
\def\appendixbox#1{%
4483
  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
4484
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
4485
  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
4486
%
4487
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4488
 
4489
% Unnumbered chapters.
4490
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
4491
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
4492
 
4493
% Sections.
4494
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4495
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
4496
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
4497
 
4498
% Subsections.
4499
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4500
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
4501
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4502
 
4503
% And subsubsections.
4504
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4505
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
4506
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4507
 
4508
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
4509
% Same as \defaultparindent.
4510
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
4511
 
4512
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
4513
% page number.
4514
%
4515
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
4516
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
4517
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
4518
   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
4519
   \begingroup
4520
     \chapentryfonts
4521
     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4522
   \endgroup
4523
   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
4524
}
4525
 
4526
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4527
  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
4528
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4529
\endgroup}
4530
 
4531
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4532
  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
4533
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4534
\endgroup}
4535
 
4536
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4537
  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
4538
  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4539
\endgroup}
4540
 
4541
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
4542
\let\tocentry = \entry
4543
 
4544
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
4545
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
4546
 
4547
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4548
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4549
 
4550
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
4551
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
4552
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4553
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4554
 
4555
 
4556
\message{environments,}
4557
% @foo ... @end foo.
4558
 
4559
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
4560
%
4561
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
4562
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
4563
%
4564
\def\point{$\star$}
4565
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
4566
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
4567
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
4568
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
4569
 
4570
% The @error{} command.
4571
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
4572
%
4573
\newbox\errorbox
4574
%
4575
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
4576
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
4577
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
4578
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
4579
%
4580
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
4581
   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
4582
   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
4583
   \vbox{%
4584
      \hrule height\dimen2
4585
      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
4586
         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
4587
         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
4588
      \hrule height\dimen2}
4589
    \hfil}
4590
%
4591
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
4592
 
4593
% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
4594
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
4595
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
4596
 
4597
\envdef\tex{%
4598
  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
4599
  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
4600
  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
4601
  \catcode `\%=14
4602
  \catcode `\+=\other
4603
  \catcode `\"=\other
4604
  \catcode `\|=\other
4605
  \catcode `\<=\other
4606
  \catcode `\>=\other
4607
  \escapechar=`\\
4608
  %
4609
  \let\b=\ptexb
4610
  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
4611
  \let\c=\ptexc
4612
  \let\,=\ptexcomma
4613
  \let\.=\ptexdot
4614
  \let\dots=\ptexdots
4615
  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
4616
  \let\!=\ptexexclam
4617
  \let\i=\ptexi
4618
  \let\indent=\ptexindent
4619
  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
4620
  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
4621
  \let\+=\tabalign
4622
  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
4623
  \let\/=\ptexslash
4624
  \let\*=\ptexstar
4625
  \let\t=\ptext
4626
  %
4627
  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
4628
  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
4629
  \def\@{@}%
4630
}
4631
% There is no need to define \Etex.
4632
 
4633
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
4634
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
4635
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
4636
 
4637
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
4638
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
4639
 
4640
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
4641
% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
4642
% have any width.
4643
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
4644
 
4645
% This space is always present above and below environments.
4646
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
4647
 
4648
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
4649
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
4650
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
4651
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
4652
%
4653
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
4654
  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.
4655
  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
4656
    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
4657
    \endgraf
4658
    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
4659
      \removelastskip
4660
      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
4661
      % or better ...
4662
      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
4663
      \vskip\envskipamount
4664
    \fi
4665
  \fi
4666
}}
4667
 
4668
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
4669
 
4670
% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
4671
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
4672
 
4673
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
4674
% environment contents.
4675
\font\circle=lcircle10
4676
\newdimen\circthick
4677
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
4678
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
4679
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
4680
%
4681
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
4682
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
4683
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
4684
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
4685
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4686
        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
4687
        \hskip\rskip}}
4688
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4689
        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
4690
        \hskip\rskip}}
4691
%
4692
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
4693
 
4694
\envdef\cartouche{%
4695
  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
4696
  \startsavinginserts
4697
  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
4698
  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
4699
  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
4700
  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
4701
  \cartouter=\hsize
4702
  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt  % allow for 3pt kerns on either
4703
                                % side, and for 6pt waste from
4704
                                % each corner char, and rule thickness
4705
  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
4706
  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
4707
  \let\nonarrowing=\comment
4708
  \vbox\bgroup
4709
      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
4710
      \carttop
4711
      \hbox\bgroup
4712
          \hskip\lskip
4713
          \vrule\kern3pt
4714
          \vbox\bgroup
4715
              \kern3pt
4716
              \hsize=\cartinner
4717
              \baselineskip=\normbskip
4718
              \lineskip=\normlskip
4719
              \parskip=\normpskip
4720
              \vskip -\parskip
4721
              \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
4722
}
4723
\def\Ecartouche{%
4724
              \ifhmode\par\fi
4725
              \kern3pt
4726
          \egroup
4727
          \kern3pt\vrule
4728
          \hskip\rskip
4729
      \egroup
4730
      \cartbot
4731
  \egroup
4732
  \checkinserts
4733
}
4734
 
4735
 
4736
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
4737
% inside a group.
4738
\def\nonfillstart{%
4739
  \aboveenvbreak
4740
  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
4741
  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
4742
  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
4743
  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
4744
  \parskip = 0pt
4745
  \parindent = 0pt
4746
  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
4747
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
4748
  % at next level down.
4749
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4750
    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4751
    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
4752
  \fi
4753
  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
4754
}
4755
 
4756
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
4757
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
4758
% This affects the following displayed environments:
4759
%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
4760
%
4761
\def\smallword{small}
4762
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
4763
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
4764
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
4765
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
4766
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
4767
  \fi
4768
}
4769
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
4770
  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
4771
  \else
4772
    \smallexamplefonts \rm
4773
  \fi
4774
}
4775
 
4776
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
4777
% Let's do it by one command:
4778
\def\makedispenv #1#2{
4779
  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
4780
  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
4781
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
4782
  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
4783
}
4784
 
4785
% Define two synonyms:
4786
\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
4787
  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
4788
  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
4789
}
4790
 
4791
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
4792
%
4793
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
4794
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
4795
%
4796
\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
4797
  \nonfillstart
4798
  \tt
4799
  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
4800
  \gobble       % eat return
4801
}
4802
 
4803
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
4804
%
4805
\makedispenv {display}{%
4806
  \nonfillstart
4807
  \gobble
4808
}
4809
 
4810
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
4811
%
4812
\makedispenv{format}{%
4813
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
4814
  \nonfillstart
4815
  \gobble
4816
}
4817
 
4818
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
4819
\envdef\flushleft{%
4820
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
4821
  \nonfillstart
4822
  \gobble
4823
}
4824
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
4825
 
4826
% @flushright.
4827
%
4828
\envdef\flushright{%
4829
  \let\nonarrowing = t%
4830
  \nonfillstart
4831
  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
4832
  \gobble
4833
}
4834
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
4835
 
4836
 
4837
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
4838
% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
4839
% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
4840
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
4841
%
4842
\envdef\quotation{%
4843
  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
4844
  \parindent=0pt
4845
  %
4846
  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
4847
  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4848
    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4849
    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
4850
    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
4851
    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
4852
  \fi
4853
  \parsearg\quotationlabel
4854
}
4855
 
4856
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
4857
% doing normal filling.
4858
%
4859
\def\Equotation{%
4860
  \par
4861
  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
4862
    % indent a bit.
4863
    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
4864
  \fi
4865
  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
4866
}
4867
 
4868
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
4869
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
4870
  \def\temp{#1}%
4871
  \ifx\temp\empty \else
4872
    {\bf #1: }%
4873
  \fi
4874
}
4875
 
4876
 
4877
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
4878
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
4879
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
4880
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
4881
%
4882
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
4883
%
4884
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
4885
% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
4886
% verbatim line.
4887
\def\dospecials{%
4888
  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
4889
  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
4890
  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
4891
}
4892
%
4893
% [Knuth] p. 380
4894
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
4895
  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
4896
%
4897
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
4898
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
4899
\begingroup
4900
  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
4901
\endgroup
4902
%
4903
% Setup for the @verb command.
4904
%
4905
% Eight spaces for a tab
4906
\begingroup
4907
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
4908
  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
4909
\endgroup
4910
%
4911
\def\setupverb{%
4912
  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
4913
  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
4914
  \catcode`\`=\active
4915
  \tabeightspaces
4916
  % Respect line breaks,
4917
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
4918
  % make each space count
4919
  % must do in this order:
4920
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
4921
}
4922
 
4923
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
4924
%
4925
% Real tab expansion
4926
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
4927
%
4928
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
4929
\begingroup
4930
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
4931
  \gdef\tabexpand{%
4932
    \catcode`\^^I=\active
4933
    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
4934
      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
4935
      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
4936
      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
4937
      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
4938
      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
4939
    }%
4940
  }
4941
\endgroup
4942
\def\setupverbatim{%
4943
  \nonfillstart
4944
  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
4945
  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
4946
  \tt
4947
  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
4948
  \catcode`\`=\active
4949
  \tabexpand
4950
  % Respect line breaks,
4951
  % print special symbols as themselves, and
4952
  % make each space count
4953
  % must do in this order:
4954
  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
4955
  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
4956
}
4957
 
4958
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
4959
% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
4960
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
4961
%
4962
%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
4963
%
4964
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
4965
\begingroup
4966
  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
4967
  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
4968
\endgroup
4969
%
4970
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
4971
%
4972
%
4973
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
4974
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
4975
%
4976
%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
4977
%
4978
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
4979
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
4980
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
4981
%
4982
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
4983
%
4984
\begingroup
4985
  \catcode`\ =\active
4986
  \obeylines %
4987
  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
4988
  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
4989
  % line in the output.
4990
  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
4991
  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
4992
  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
4993
\endgroup
4994
%
4995
\envdef\verbatim{%
4996
    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
4997
}
4998
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
4999
 
5000
 
5001
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
5002
%
5003
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
5004
%
5005
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
5006
  {%
5007
    \makevalueexpandable
5008
    \setupverbatim
5009
    \input #1
5010
    \afterenvbreak
5011
  }%
5012
}
5013
 
5014
% @copying ... @end copying.
5015
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.  Many commands won't be
5016
% allowed in this context, but that's ok.
5017
%
5018
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
5019
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
5020
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
5021
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
5022
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
5023
% possible is very desirable.
5024
%
5025
\def\copying{\begingroup
5026
  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.
5027
  % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the
5028
  % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read
5029
  % it, but that doesn't matter.
5030
  \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}%
5031
  %
5032
  % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.
5033
  \catcode`\^^M = \active
5034
  \docopying
5035
}
5036
 
5037
% What we do to finish off the copying text.
5038
%
5039
\def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
5040
 
5041
% @insertcopying.  Here we must play games with ^^M's.  On the one hand,
5042
% we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
5043
% must be active.  On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
5044
% end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
5045
% definition of ^^M.  On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
5046
% generate a \par.
5047
%
5048
% Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
5049
% then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1.  If it does, then manually
5050
% do \par.
5051
%
5052
% This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
5053
% it.  Similarly for @ignore.  (These commands are used in the gcc
5054
% manual for man page generation.)
5055
%
5056
% Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
5057
% fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
5058
% should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
5059
%
5060
{\catcode`\^^M=\active %
5061
\gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
5062
  \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
5063
  \def^^M{%
5064
    \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
5065
      \par %
5066
    \else %
5067
      \space \penalty 1 %
5068
    \fi %
5069
  }%
5070
  %
5071
  % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
5072
  \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
5073
  \let\comment = \c %
5074
  %
5075
  % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
5076
  % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
5077
  \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
5078
  %
5079
  \copyingtext %
5080
\endgroup}%
5081
}
5082
 
5083
\message{defuns,}
5084
% @defun etc.
5085
 
5086
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
5087
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
5088
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
5089
 
5090
% Start the processing of @deffn:
5091
\def\startdefun{%
5092
  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
5093
    \medbreak
5094
  \else
5095
    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
5096
    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
5097
    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
5098
    % break somewhere.  Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
5099
    % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
5100
    % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
5101
    % between a section heading and a defun.
5102
    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
5103
    %
5104
    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
5105
    % But do insert the glue.
5106
    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
5107
  \fi
5108
  %
5109
  \parindent=0in
5110
  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
5111
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5112
}
5113
 
5114
\def\dodefunx#1{%
5115
  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
5116
  \checkenv#1%
5117
  %
5118
  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
5119
  % It's not a great place, though.
5120
  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
5121
  %
5122
  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
5123
  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
5124
}
5125
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
5126
 
5127
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
5128
%
5129
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
5130
  \begingroup
5131
    % call \deffnheader:
5132
    #1#2 \endheader
5133
    % common ending:
5134
    \interlinepenalty = 10000
5135
    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
5136
    \endgraf
5137
    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
5138
    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
5139
    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
5140
    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
5141
    \checkparencounts
5142
  \endgroup
5143
}
5144
 
5145
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
5146
 
5147
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
5148
% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
5149
%
5150
\def\makedefun#1{%
5151
  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
5152
  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
5153
    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
5154
  \temp
5155
}
5156
 
5157
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
5158
%
5159
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
5160
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
5161
%
5162
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
5163
  \envdef#1{%
5164
    \startdefun
5165
    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
5166
  }%
5167
  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
5168
  \def#3%
5169
}
5170
 
5171
%%% Untyped functions:
5172
 
5173
% @deffn category name args
5174
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
5175
 
5176
% @deffn category class name args
5177
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5178
 
5179
% \defopon {category on}class name args
5180
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5181
 
5182
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
5183
%
5184
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
5185
  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
5186
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
5187
  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
5188
}
5189
 
5190
%%% Typed functions:
5191
 
5192
% @deftypefn category type name args
5193
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
5194
 
5195
% @deftypeop category class type name args
5196
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5197
 
5198
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
5199
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5200
 
5201
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
5202
%
5203
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5204
  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5205
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5206
}
5207
 
5208
%%% Typed variables:
5209
 
5210
% @deftypevr category type var args
5211
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
5212
 
5213
% @deftypecv category class type var args
5214
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5215
 
5216
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
5217
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5218
 
5219
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
5220
%
5221
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5222
  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5223
  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5224
}
5225
 
5226
%%% Untyped variables:
5227
 
5228
% @defvr category var args
5229
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
5230
 
5231
% @defcv category class var args
5232
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5233
 
5234
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
5235
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
5236
 
5237
%%% Type:
5238
% @deftp category name args
5239
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
5240
  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
5241
  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
5242
}
5243
 
5244
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
5245
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5246
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
5247
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
5248
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5249
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5250
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
5251
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5252
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
5253
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
5254
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5255
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5256
 
5257
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
5258
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
5259
% #2 is the return type, if any.
5260
% #3 is the function name.
5261
%
5262
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
5263
%
5264
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
5265
  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
5266
  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
5267
  %
5268
  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
5269
  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
5270
  % just below it.
5271
  \def\temp{#1}%
5272
  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
5273
  %
5274
  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
5275
  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
5276
  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
5277
  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
5278
  % The continuations:
5279
  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
5280
  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
5281
  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
5282
  %
5283
  % Put the type name to the right margin.
5284
  \noindent
5285
  \hbox to 0pt{%
5286
    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
5287
    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
5288
    \kern\leftskip
5289
    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
5290
  }%
5291
  %
5292
  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
5293
  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
5294
  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5295
  {%
5296
    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
5297
    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
5298
    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
5299
    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
5300
    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
5301
    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
5302
    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
5303
    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
5304
    \df \tt
5305
    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
5306
    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
5307
    #3% output function name
5308
  }%
5309
  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
5310
  %
5311
  \boldbrax
5312
  % arguments will be output next, if any.
5313
}
5314
 
5315
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
5316
% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
5317
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
5318
% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
5319
%
5320
\def\defunargs#1{%
5321
  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
5322
  % tt for the names.
5323
  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
5324
  %
5325
  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
5326
  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
5327
  \let\var=\ttslanted
5328
  #1%
5329
  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
5330
}
5331
 
5332
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
5333
%
5334
\def\activeparens{%
5335
  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
5336
  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
5337
  \catcode`\&=\active
5338
}
5339
 
5340
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
5341
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
5342
 
5343
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
5344
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
5345
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
5346
{
5347
  \activeparens
5348
  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
5349
  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
5350
  \global\let& = \&
5351
 
5352
  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
5353
  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
5354
}
5355
 
5356
\newcount\parencount
5357
 
5358
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
5359
\newif\ifampseen
5360
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
5361
 
5362
\def\parenfont{%
5363
  \ifampseen
5364
    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
5365
    % otherwise use the default font.
5366
    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
5367
  \else
5368
    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
5369
    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
5370
    \sf
5371
  \fi
5372
}
5373
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
5374
  \ifampseen
5375
    \ifnum\parencount=1
5376
      #1%
5377
    \fi
5378
  \fi
5379
}
5380
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
5381
 
5382
\def\opnr{%
5383
  \global\advance\parencount by 1
5384
  {\parenfont(}%
5385
  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
5386
}
5387
\def\clnr{%
5388
  {\parenfont)}%
5389
  \infirstlevel \sl
5390
  \global\advance\parencount by -1
5391
}
5392
 
5393
\newcount\brackcount
5394
\def\lbrb{%
5395
  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
5396
  {\bf[}%
5397
}
5398
\def\rbrb{%
5399
  {\bf]}%
5400
  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
5401
}
5402
 
5403
\def\checkparencounts{%
5404
  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
5405
  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
5406
}
5407
\def\badparencount{%
5408
  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
5409
  \global\parencount=0
5410
}
5411
\def\badbrackcount{%
5412
  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
5413
  \global\brackcount=0
5414
}
5415
 
5416
 
5417
\message{macros,}
5418
% @macro.
5419
 
5420
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
5421
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
5422
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
5423
  \newwrite\macscribble
5424
  \def\scantokens#1{%
5425
    \toks0={#1\endinput}%
5426
    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
5427
    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
5428
    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
5429
    \input \jobname.tmp
5430
  }
5431
\fi
5432
 
5433
\def\scanmacro#1{%
5434
  \begingroup
5435
    \newlinechar`\^^M
5436
    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
5437
    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5438
    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
5439
    % ... and \example
5440
    \spaceisspace
5441
    %
5442
    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
5443
    %
5444
    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
5445
    %                                                   --kasal, 29nov03
5446
    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
5447
  \endgroup
5448
}
5449
 
5450
\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
5451
\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
5452
\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
5453
\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
5454
                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
5455
 
5456
% Utility routines.
5457
% This does \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
5458
\def\cslet#1#2{%
5459
\expandafter\expandafter
5460
\expandafter\let
5461
\expandafter\expandafter
5462
\csname#1\endcsname
5463
\csname#2\endcsname}
5464
 
5465
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
5466
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
5467
{\catcode`\@=11
5468
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
5469
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
5470
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
5471
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
5472
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
5473
}
5474
 
5475
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
5476
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
5477
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
5478
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
5479
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
5480
}
5481
 
5482
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
5483
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
5484
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
5485
 
5486
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
5487
% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
5488
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
5489
 
5490
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
5491
  \catcode`\~=\other
5492
  \catcode`\^=\other
5493
  \catcode`\_=\other
5494
  \catcode`\|=\other
5495
  \catcode`\<=\other
5496
  \catcode`\>=\other
5497
  \catcode`\+=\other
5498
  \catcode`\{=\other
5499
  \catcode`\}=\other
5500
  \catcode`\@=\other
5501
  \catcode`\^^M=\other
5502
  \usembodybackslash}
5503
 
5504
\def\macroargctxt{%
5505
  \catcode`\~=\other
5506
  \catcode`\^=\other
5507
  \catcode`\_=\other
5508
  \catcode`\|=\other
5509
  \catcode`\<=\other
5510
  \catcode`\>=\other
5511
  \catcode`\+=\other
5512
  \catcode`\@=\other
5513
  \catcode`\\=\other}
5514
 
5515
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
5516
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
5517
% where N is the macro parameter number.
5518
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
5519
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
5520
 
5521
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
5522
 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
5523
 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
5524
}
5525
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
5526
 
5527
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
5528
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
5529
 
5530
\def\macroxxx#1{%
5531
  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
5532
  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
5533
     \paramno=0%
5534
  \else
5535
     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
5536
  \fi
5537
  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
5538
     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
5539
  \else
5540
     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
5541
     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
5542
     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
5543
     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
5544
     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
5545
     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
5546
     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
5547
       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
5548
  \fi
5549
  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
5550
  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
5551
  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
5552
  \fi}
5553
 
5554
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
5555
  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
5556
    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
5557
    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
5558
    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
5559
    \begingroup
5560
      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
5561
      \let\do\unmacrodo
5562
      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
5563
    \endgroup
5564
  \else
5565
    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
5566
  \fi
5567
}
5568
 
5569
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
5570
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
5571
%
5572
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
5573
  \ifx#1\relax
5574
    % remove this
5575
  \else
5576
    \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
5577
  \fi
5578
}
5579
 
5580
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
5581
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
5582
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
5583
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
5584
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
5585
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
5586
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
5587
 
5588
% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
5589
% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
5590
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
5591
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
5592
 
5593
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
5594
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
5595
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
5596
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
5597
%
5598
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
5599
% the macro is used.
5600
 
5601
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
5602
        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
5603
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
5604
  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
5605
  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
5606
    \advance\paramno by 1%
5607
    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
5608
        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
5609
    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
5610
  \fi\next}
5611
 
5612
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
5613
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
5614
 
5615
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
5616
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5617
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
5618
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5619
 
5620
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
5621
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
5622
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
5623
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
5624
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
5625
\def\defmacro{%
5626
  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
5627
  \ifrecursive
5628
    \ifcase\paramno
5629
    % 0
5630
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5631
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5632
    \or % 1
5633
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5634
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5635
         \noexpand\braceorline
5636
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5637
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5638
         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5639
    \else % many
5640
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5641
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5642
         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5643
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5644
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5645
      \expandafter\expandafter
5646
      \expandafter\xdef
5647
      \expandafter\expandafter
5648
        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5649
          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5650
    \fi
5651
  \else
5652
    \ifcase\paramno
5653
    % 0
5654
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5655
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5656
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5657
    \or % 1
5658
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5659
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5660
         \noexpand\braceorline
5661
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5662
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5663
        \egroup
5664
        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5665
        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5666
    \else % many
5667
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5668
         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5669
         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5670
      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5671
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5672
      \expandafter\expandafter
5673
      \expandafter\xdef
5674
      \expandafter\expandafter
5675
      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5676
      \paramlist{%
5677
          \egroup
5678
          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5679
          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5680
    \fi
5681
  \fi}
5682
 
5683
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
5684
 
5685
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
5686
% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
5687
% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
5688
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
5689
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
5690
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
5691
  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
5692
    \expandafter\parsearg
5693
  \fi \next}
5694
 
5695
% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
5696
% expanded by \write.
5697
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
5698
  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5699
 
5700
 
5701
% @alias.
5702
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
5703
% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
5704
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
5705
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
5706
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
5707
  {%
5708
    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
5709
    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
5710
  }%
5711
  \next
5712
}
5713
 
5714
 
5715
\message{cross references,}
5716
 
5717
\newwrite\auxfile
5718
 
5719
\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
5720
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
5721
 
5722
% @inforef is relatively simple.
5723
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
5724
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
5725
  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
5726
 
5727
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
5728
% cross-references.
5729
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\nodexxx #1,\finishnodeparse}
5730
\def\nodexxx#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
5731
\let\nwnode=\node
5732
\let\lastnode=\empty
5733
 
5734
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
5735
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
5736
%
5737
\def\donoderef#1{%
5738
  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
5739
    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
5740
    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
5741
  \fi
5742
}
5743
 
5744
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
5745
%
5746
\newcount\savesfregister
5747
%
5748
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
5749
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
5750
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
5751
 
5752
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
5753
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
5754
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
5755
%                 or the anchor name.
5756
% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
5757
%                 empty for anchors.
5758
% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
5759
%
5760
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
5761
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
5762
% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
5763
%
5764
\def\setref#1#2{%
5765
  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
5766
  \iflinks
5767
    {%
5768
      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
5769
      \turnoffactive
5770
      \otherbackslash
5771
      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
5772
        \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
5773
          ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
5774
      }%
5775
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
5776
      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
5777
      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
5778
      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
5779
    }%
5780
  \fi
5781
}
5782
 
5783
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
5784
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
5785
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
5786
% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
5787
%
5788
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5789
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5790
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5791
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
5792
  \unsepspaces
5793
  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
5794
  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
5795
  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
5796
  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
5797
  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
5798
    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
5799
    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
5800
      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
5801
      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
5802
    \else
5803
      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
5804
      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
5805
      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
5806
        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
5807
        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
5808
      \else
5809
        \ifhavexrefs
5810
          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
5811
          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
5812
        \else
5813
          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
5814
          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
5815
        \fi%
5816
      \fi
5817
    \fi
5818
  \fi
5819
  %
5820
  % Make link in pdf output.
5821
  \ifpdf
5822
    \leavevmode
5823
    \getfilename{#4}%
5824
    {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
5825
     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
5826
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
5827
         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
5828
     \else
5829
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
5830
         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}%
5831
     \fi
5832
    }%
5833
    \linkcolor
5834
  \fi
5835
  %
5836
  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
5837
  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
5838
  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
5839
  {%
5840
    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
5841
    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
5842
    \indexnofonts
5843
    \turnoffactive
5844
    \otherbackslash
5845
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
5846
      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
5847
  }%
5848
  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
5849
    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
5850
    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
5851
    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
5852
      \refx{#1-snt}%
5853
    \else
5854
      \printedrefname
5855
    \fi
5856
    %
5857
    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
5858
    % "in MANUALNAME".
5859
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
5860
      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
5861
    \fi
5862
  \else
5863
    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
5864
    %
5865
    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
5866
    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
5867
    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
5868
    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
5869
    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
5870
    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
5871
    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
5872
      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
5873
    \else
5874
      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
5875
      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
5876
      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
5877
      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
5878
      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
5879
      {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
5880
       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
5881
       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
5882
       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
5883
       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
5884
      }%
5885
      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
5886
      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
5887
      %
5888
      % But we always want a comma and a space:
5889
      ,\space
5890
      %
5891
      % output the `page 3'.
5892
      \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
5893
    \fi
5894
  \fi
5895
  \endlink
5896
\endgroup}
5897
 
5898
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
5899
% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
5900
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
5901
% one that Bob is working on :).
5902
%
5903
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
5904
 
5905
% Things referred to by \setref.
5906
%
5907
\def\Ynothing{}
5908
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
5909
\def\Ynumbered{%
5910
  \ifnum\secno=0
5911
    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
5912
  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
5913
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
5914
  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
5915
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
5916
  \else
5917
    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
5918
  \fi\fi\fi
5919
}
5920
\def\Yappendix{%
5921
  \ifnum\secno=0
5922
     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
5923
  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
5924
     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
5925
  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
5926
    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
5927
  \else
5928
    \putwordSection@tie
5929
      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
5930
  \fi\fi\fi
5931
}
5932
 
5933
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
5934
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
5935
%
5936
\def\refx#1#2{%
5937
  {%
5938
    \indexnofonts
5939
    \otherbackslash
5940
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
5941
      \csname XR#1\endcsname
5942
  }%
5943
  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
5944
    % If not defined, say something at least.
5945
    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
5946
    \iflinks
5947
      \ifhavexrefs
5948
        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
5949
      \else
5950
        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
5951
          \global\warnedxrefstrue
5952
          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
5953
        \fi
5954
      \fi
5955
    \fi
5956
  \else
5957
    % It's defined, so just use it.
5958
    \thisrefX
5959
  \fi
5960
  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
5961
}
5962
 
5963
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
5964
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
5965
% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
5966
%
5967
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
5968
  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
5969
  %
5970
  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
5971
  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
5972
    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
5973
    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
5974
      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
5975
    %
5976
    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
5977
    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
5978
      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
5979
    \else
5980
      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
5981
      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
5982
    \fi
5983
    %
5984
    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
5985
    % for later use in \listoffloats.
5986
    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
5987
  \fi
5988
}
5989
 
5990
% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
5991
%
5992
\def\tryauxfile{%
5993
  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
5994
  \ifeof 1 \else
5995
    \readauxfile
5996
    \global\havexrefstrue
5997
  \fi
5998
  \closein 1
5999
}
6000
 
6001
\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
6002
  \catcode`\^^@=\other
6003
  \catcode`\^^A=\other
6004
  \catcode`\^^B=\other
6005
  \catcode`\^^C=\other
6006
  \catcode`\^^D=\other
6007
  \catcode`\^^E=\other
6008
  \catcode`\^^F=\other
6009
  \catcode`\^^G=\other
6010
  \catcode`\^^H=\other
6011
  \catcode`\^^K=\other
6012
  \catcode`\^^L=\other
6013
  \catcode`\^^N=\other
6014
  \catcode`\^^P=\other
6015
  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
6016
  \catcode`\^^R=\other
6017
  \catcode`\^^S=\other
6018
  \catcode`\^^T=\other
6019
  \catcode`\^^U=\other
6020
  \catcode`\^^V=\other
6021
  \catcode`\^^W=\other
6022
  \catcode`\^^X=\other
6023
  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
6024
  \catcode`\^^[=\other
6025
  \catcode`\^^\=\other
6026
  \catcode`\^^]=\other
6027
  \catcode`\^^^=\other
6028
  \catcode`\^^_=\other
6029
  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
6030
  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
6031
  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
6032
  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
6033
  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
6034
  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
6035
  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
6036
  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
6037
  %
6038
  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
6039
  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
6040
  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
6041
  %
6042
  \catcode`\^=\other
6043
  %
6044
  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
6045
  \catcode`\~=\other
6046
  \catcode`\[=\other
6047
  \catcode`\]=\other
6048
  \catcode`\"=\other
6049
  \catcode`\_=\other
6050
  \catcode`\|=\other
6051
  \catcode`\<=\other
6052
  \catcode`\>=\other
6053
  \catcode`\$=\other
6054
  \catcode`\#=\other
6055
  \catcode`\&=\other
6056
  \catcode`\%=\other
6057
  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
6058
  %
6059
  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
6060
  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
6061
  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
6062
  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
6063
  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
6064
  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
6065
  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
6066
  \catcode`\\=\other
6067
  %
6068
  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
6069
  {%
6070
    \count 1=128
6071
    \def\loop{%
6072
      \catcode\count 1=\other
6073
      \advance\count 1 by 1
6074
      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
6075
    }%
6076
  }%
6077
  %
6078
  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
6079
  \catcode`\{=1
6080
  \catcode`\}=2
6081
  \catcode`\@=0
6082
  %
6083
  \input \jobname.aux
6084
\endgroup}
6085
 
6086
 
6087
\message{insertions,}
6088
% including footnotes.
6089
 
6090
\newcount \footnoteno
6091
 
6092
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
6093
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
6094
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
6095
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
6096
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
6097
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
6098
 
6099
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
6100
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
6101
 
6102
{\catcode `\@=11
6103
%
6104
% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
6105
\gdef\footnote{%
6106
  \let\indent=\ptexindent
6107
  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6108
  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
6109
  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
6110
  %
6111
  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
6112
  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
6113
  \let\@sf\empty
6114
  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
6115
  %
6116
  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
6117
  \unskip
6118
  \thisfootno\@sf
6119
  \dofootnote
6120
}%
6121
 
6122
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
6123
% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
6124
%
6125
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
6126
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
6127
% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
6128
%
6129
\gdef\dofootnote{%
6130
  \insert\footins\bgroup
6131
  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
6132
  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
6133
  % So reset some parameters.
6134
  \hsize=\pagewidth
6135
  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
6136
  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
6137
  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
6138
  \floatingpenalty\@MM
6139
  \leftskip\z@skip
6140
  \rightskip\z@skip
6141
  \spaceskip\z@skip
6142
  \xspaceskip\z@skip
6143
  \parindent\defaultparindent
6144
  %
6145
  \smallfonts \rm
6146
  %
6147
  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
6148
  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
6149
  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
6150
  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
6151
  \let\noindent = \relax
6152
  %
6153
  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
6154
  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
6155
  \everypar = {\hang}%
6156
  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
6157
  %
6158
  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
6159
  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
6160
  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
6161
  \footstrut
6162
  \futurelet\next\fo@t
6163
}
6164
}%end \catcode `\@=11
6165
 
6166
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
6167
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
6168
% would be lost.
6169
% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
6170
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
6171
% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
6172
 
6173
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
6174
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
6175
% out prematurely.
6176
%
6177
\def\startsavinginserts{%
6178
  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
6179
    \let\insert\saveinsert
6180
  \else
6181
    \let\checkinserts\relax
6182
  \fi
6183
}
6184
 
6185
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
6186
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
6187
%
6188
\def\saveinsert#1{%
6189
  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
6190
  \afterassignment\next
6191
  % swallow the left brace
6192
  \let\temp =
6193
}
6194
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
6195
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
6196
 
6197
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
6198
 
6199
\def\placesaveins#1{%
6200
  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
6201
    {\box#1}%
6202
}
6203
 
6204
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
6205
{
6206
  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
6207
  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
6208
}
6209
 
6210
% initialization:
6211
\def\newsaveins #1{%
6212
  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
6213
  \next
6214
}
6215
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
6216
  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
6217
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
6218
    \checksaveins #1}%
6219
}
6220
 
6221
% initialize:
6222
\let\checkinserts\empty
6223
\newsaveins\footins
6224
\newsaveins\margin
6225
 
6226
 
6227
% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
6228
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
6229
%
6230
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
6231
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
6232
% undone and the next image would fail.
6233
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
6234
\ifeof 1 \else
6235
  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
6236
  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
6237
  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
6238
  \input epsf.tex
6239
\fi
6240
\closein 1
6241
%
6242
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
6243
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
6244
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
6245
  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
6246
  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
6247
%
6248
\def\image#1{%
6249
  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
6250
    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
6251
      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
6252
      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
6253
      \global\warnednoepsftrue
6254
    \fi
6255
  \else
6256
    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
6257
  \fi
6258
}
6259
%
6260
% Arguments to @image:
6261
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
6262
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
6263
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
6264
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
6265
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
6266
\newif\ifimagevmode
6267
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
6268
  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
6269
  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
6270
  % If the image is by itself, center it.
6271
  \ifvmode
6272
    \imagevmodetrue
6273
    \nobreak\bigskip
6274
    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
6275
    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
6276
    % above and below.
6277
    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
6278
    \nobreak
6279
    \line\bgroup\hss
6280
  \fi
6281
  %
6282
  % Output the image.
6283
  \ifpdf
6284
    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6285
  \else
6286
    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
6287
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
6288
    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
6289
    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
6290
  \fi
6291
  %
6292
  \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
6293
\endgroup}
6294
 
6295
 
6296
% @float FLOATTYPE,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, etc.
6297
% We don't actually implement floating yet, we just plop the float "here".
6298
% But it seemed the best name for the future.
6299
%
6300
\envparseargdef\float{\dofloat #1,,,\finish}
6301
 
6302
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
6303
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
6304
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
6305
%
6306
% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
6307
% be referable.
6308
%
6309
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
6310
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
6311
%
6312
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
6313
% chapter-level command.
6314
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
6315
%
6316
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
6317
  \let\thiscaption=\empty
6318
  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
6319
  %
6320
  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
6321
  \startsavinginserts
6322
  %
6323
  \vtop\bgroup
6324
    \def\floattype{#1}%
6325
    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
6326
    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
6327
    %
6328
    \ifx\floattype\empty
6329
      \let\safefloattype=\empty
6330
    \else
6331
      {%
6332
        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6333
        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6334
        \indexnofonts
6335
        \turnoffactive
6336
        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6337
      }%
6338
    \fi
6339
    %
6340
    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
6341
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6342
      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
6343
      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
6344
      %
6345
      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
6346
      \global\advance\floatno by 1
6347
      %
6348
      {%
6349
        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
6350
        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
6351
        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
6352
        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
6353
        % lists of floats.
6354
        %
6355
        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
6356
        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
6357
      }%
6358
    \fi
6359
    %
6360
    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
6361
    \vskip\parskip
6362
    %
6363
    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
6364
    \restorefirstparagraphindent
6365
}
6366
 
6367
% we have these possibilities:
6368
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
6369
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
6370
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
6371
% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
6372
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
6373
% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
6374
% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
6375
% @float & no caption:
6376
%
6377
\def\Efloat{%
6378
    \let\floatident = \empty
6379
    %
6380
    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
6381
    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
6382
    %
6383
    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
6384
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6385
      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
6386
        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
6387
      \fi
6388
      % the number.
6389
      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6390
    \fi
6391
    %
6392
    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
6393
    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
6394
    \let\captionline = \floatident
6395
    %
6396
    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
6397
      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
6398
        \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
6399
      \fi
6400
      %
6401
      % caption text.
6402
      \appendtomacro\captionline\thiscaption
6403
    \fi
6404
    %
6405
    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
6406
    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
6407
    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
6408
      \vskip.5\parskip
6409
      \captionline
6410
    \fi
6411
    %
6412
    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
6413
    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
6414
    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6415
      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
6416
      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
6417
      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
6418
      {%
6419
        \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash
6420
        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{%
6421
          \floatident
6422
          \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
6423
            \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else : \thiscaption \fi
6424
          \else
6425
            : \thisshortcaption
6426
          \fi
6427
        }}%
6428
      }%
6429
    \fi
6430
    %
6431
    % Space below caption, if we printed anything.
6432
    \ifx\printedsomething\empty \else \vskip\parskip \fi
6433
  \egroup  % end of \vtop
6434
  \checkinserts
6435
}
6436
 
6437
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
6438
%
6439
\newtoks\appendtomacroAtoks
6440
\newtoks\appendtomacroBtoks
6441
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
6442
  \appendtomacroAtoks = \expandafter{#1}%
6443
  \appendtomacroBtoks = {#2}%
6444
  \edef#1{\the\appendtomacroAtoks \the\appendtomacroBtoks}%
6445
}
6446
 
6447
% @caption, @shortcaption are easy.
6448
%
6449
\long\def\caption#1{\checkenv\float \def\thiscaption{#1}}
6450
\def\shortcaption#1{\checkenv\float \def\thisshortcaption{#1}}
6451
 
6452
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
6453
% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
6454
\def\getfloatno#1{%
6455
  \ifx#1\relax
6456
      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
6457
      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
6458
      %
6459
      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
6460
      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
6461
        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
6462
  \fi
6463
  \let\floatno#1%
6464
}
6465
 
6466
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
6467
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
6468
% first read the @float command.
6469
%
6470
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6471
 
6472
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
6473
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
6474
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
6475
 
6476
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
6477
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
6478
% \thissection value which we \setref above.
6479
%
6480
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
6481
%
6482
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
6483
% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
6484
%
6485
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
6486
  \def\temp{#1}%
6487
  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
6488
  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
6489
}
6490
 
6491
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
6492
%
6493
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
6494
  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
6495
  {%
6496
    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6497
    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6498
    \indexnofonts
6499
    \turnoffactive
6500
    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6501
  }%
6502
  %
6503
  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
6504
  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
6505
    \ifhavexrefs
6506
      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
6507
      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
6508
    \fi
6509
  \else
6510
    \begingroup
6511
      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
6512
      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
6513
      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
6514
    \endgroup
6515
  \fi
6516
}
6517
 
6518
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
6519
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
6520
% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
6521
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
6522
%
6523
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
6524
% they won't appear in the aux file).
6525
%
6526
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
6527
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
6528
  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
6529
  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
6530
  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
6531
  % in pdf output.
6532
  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
6533
  %
6534
  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
6535
  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
6536
  \writeentry
6537
}}
6538
 
6539
\message{localization,}
6540
% and i18n.
6541
 
6542
% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
6543
% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
6544
% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
6545
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
6546
%
6547
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
6548
  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
6549
    % Read the file if it exists.
6550
    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
6551
    \ifeof 1
6552
      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
6553
      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
6554
    \else
6555
      \input txi-#1.tex
6556
    \fi
6557
    \closein 1
6558
  \endgroup
6559
}
6560
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
6561
is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
6562
should work if nowhere else does.}
6563
 
6564
 
6565
% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
6566
% likely, but for now just recognize it.
6567
\let\documentencoding = \comment
6568
 
6569
 
6570
% Page size parameters.
6571
%
6572
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
6573
 
6574
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
6575
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
6576
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
6577
 
6578
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
6579
\vbadness = 10000
6580
 
6581
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
6582
\hbadness = 2000
6583
 
6584
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
6585
\widowpenalty=10000
6586
\clubpenalty=10000
6587
 
6588
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
6589
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
6590
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
6591
% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
6592
%
6593
\def\setemergencystretch{%
6594
  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
6595
    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
6596
    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
6597
  \else
6598
    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
6599
  \fi
6600
}
6601
 
6602
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
6603
% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
6604
% physical page width.
6605
%
6606
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
6607
% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
6608
%
6609
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
6610
  \voffset = #3\relax
6611
  \topskip = #6\relax
6612
  \splittopskip = \topskip
6613
  %
6614
  \vsize = #1\relax
6615
  \advance\vsize by \topskip
6616
  \outervsize = \vsize
6617
  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
6618
  \pageheight = \vsize
6619
  %
6620
  \hsize = #2\relax
6621
  \outerhsize = \hsize
6622
  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
6623
  \pagewidth = \hsize
6624
  %
6625
  \normaloffset = #4\relax
6626
  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
6627
  %
6628
  \ifpdf
6629
    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
6630
    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
6631
  \fi
6632
  %
6633
  \setleading{\textleading}
6634
  %
6635
  \parindent = \defaultparindent
6636
  \setemergencystretch
6637
}
6638
 
6639
% @letterpaper (the default).
6640
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6641
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6642
  \textleading = 13.2pt
6643
  %
6644
  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
6645
  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
6646
                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6647
                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
6648
                    {11in}{8.5in}%
6649
}}
6650
 
6651
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
6652
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6653
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
6654
  \textleading = 12pt
6655
  %
6656
  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
6657
                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6658
                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
6659
                    {9.25in}{7in}%
6660
  %
6661
  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
6662
  \tolerance = 700
6663
  \hfuzz = 1pt
6664
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6665
  \defbodyindent = .5cm
6666
}}
6667
 
6668
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
6669
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6670
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6671
  \textleading = 13.2pt
6672
  %
6673
  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
6674
  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
6675
  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
6676
  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
6677
  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
6678
  % your texinfo source file like this:
6679
  % @tex
6680
  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
6681
  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
6682
  % @end tex
6683
  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
6684
                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
6685
                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6686
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6687
  %
6688
  \tolerance = 700
6689
  \hfuzz = 1pt
6690
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6691
  \defbodyindent = 5mm
6692
}}
6693
 
6694
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
6695
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
6696
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
6697
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6698
  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
6699
  \textleading = 12.5pt
6700
  %
6701
  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
6702
                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
6703
                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
6704
                    {210mm}{148mm}%
6705
  %
6706
  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
6707
  \tolerance = 800
6708
  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
6709
  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6710
  \defbodyindent = 2mm
6711
  \tableindent = 12mm
6712
}}
6713
 
6714
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
6715
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
6716
  \afourpaper
6717
  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
6718
                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
6719
                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
6720
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6721
  %
6722
  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
6723
  \globaldefs = 0
6724
}}
6725
 
6726
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
6727
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
6728
  \afourpaper
6729
  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
6730
                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
6731
                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
6732
                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6733
  \globaldefs = 0
6734
}}
6735
 
6736
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
6737
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
6738
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
6739
%
6740
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
6741
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
6742
  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
6743
  \globaldefs = 1
6744
  %
6745
  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6746
  \setleading{\textleading}%
6747
  %
6748
  \dimen0 = #1
6749
  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
6750
  %
6751
  \dimen2 = \hsize
6752
  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
6753
  %
6754
  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
6755
                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
6756
                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6757
                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
6758
}}
6759
 
6760
% Set default to letter.
6761
%
6762
\letterpaper
6763
 
6764
 
6765
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
6766
 
6767
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
6768
\catcode`\"=\other
6769
\catcode`\~=\other
6770
\catcode`\^=\other
6771
\catcode`\_=\other
6772
\catcode`\|=\other
6773
\catcode`\<=\other
6774
\catcode`\>=\other
6775
\catcode`\+=\other
6776
\catcode`\$=\other
6777
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
6778
\def\normaltilde{~}
6779
\def\normalcaret{^}
6780
\def\normalunderscore{_}
6781
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
6782
\def\normalless{<}
6783
\def\normalgreater{>}
6784
\def\normalplus{+}
6785
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
6786
 
6787
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
6788
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
6789
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
6790
%
6791
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
6792
% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
6793
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
6794
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
6795
%
6796
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
6797
 
6798
% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
6799
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
6800
% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
6801
% this is not a problem.
6802
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
6803
 
6804
% Turn off all special characters except @
6805
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
6806
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
6807
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
6808
 
6809
\catcode`\"=\active
6810
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
6811
\let"=\activedoublequote
6812
\catcode`\~=\active
6813
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
6814
\chardef\hat=`\^
6815
\catcode`\^=\active
6816
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
6817
 
6818
\catcode`\_=\active
6819
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
6820
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
6821
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
6822
 
6823
\catcode`\|=\active
6824
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
6825
\chardef \less=`\<
6826
\catcode`\<=\active
6827
\def<{{\tt \less}}
6828
\chardef \gtr=`\>
6829
\catcode`\>=\active
6830
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
6831
\catcode`\+=\active
6832
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
6833
\catcode`\$=\active
6834
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
6835
 
6836
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
6837
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
6838
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
6839
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
6840
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
6841
 
6842
\catcode`\@=0
6843
 
6844
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
6845
% as in \char`\\.
6846
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
6847
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
6848
 
6849
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
6850
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
6851
% catcode other.
6852
{\catcode`\\=\active
6853
 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
6854
 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
6855
}
6856
 
6857
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
6858
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
6859
 
6860
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
6861
\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}}
6862
 
6863
\catcode`\\=\active
6864
 
6865
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
6866
% even after parsing them.
6867
@def@turnoffactive{%
6868
  @let"=@normaldoublequote
6869
  @let\=@realbackslash
6870
  @let~=@normaltilde
6871
  @let^=@normalcaret
6872
  @let_=@normalunderscore
6873
  @let|=@normalverticalbar
6874
  @let<=@normalless
6875
  @let>=@normalgreater
6876
  @let+=@normalplus
6877
  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
6878
  @unsepspaces
6879
}
6880
 
6881
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
6882
% the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
6883
% effect.)
6884
%
6885
@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
6886
 
6887
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
6888
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
6889
@otherifyactive
6890
 
6891
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
6892
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
6893
% a backslash.
6894
%
6895
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
6896
@global@let\ = @eatinput
6897
 
6898
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
6899
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
6900
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
6901
% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
6902
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
6903
%
6904
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
6905
  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
6906
  @catcode`+=@active
6907
  @catcode`@_=@active
6908
}
6909
 
6910
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
6911
@escapechar = `@@
6912
 
6913
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
6914
@catcode`@& = @other
6915
@catcode`@# = @other
6916
@catcode`@% = @other
6917
 
6918
 
6919
@c Local variables:
6920
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
6921
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
6922
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
6923
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
6924
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
6925
@c End:
6926
 
6927
@c vim:sw=2:
6928
 
6929
@ignore
6930
   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
6931
@end ignore

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.